a) DCAM Part 66 - Module 3.pdf

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS

g n i n

i a r MODULE 3: ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS f T o g (PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2) y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M For Training Purposes Only

Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011 Page i

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS

WARNING

i a r T

g n i n

This document is intended for the purposes of training only. The information contained herein is as accurate as

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M

possible at the time of issue, and is subject to ongoing amendments where necessary according to any

regulatory journals and documents. Where the information contained in this document is in variation with other official journals and/or documents, the latter must be taken as the overriding document. The contents herein shall not be reproduced in any form without the expressed permission of ETD

For Training Purposes Only

Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011 Page ii

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.1 ELECTRON THEORY (EASA Ref: 3.1) Level 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 1 3.1.1 Atomic Structure....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1 3.1.2 Atomic Number......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3

g n i n

3.1.3 Ionisation .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5 3.1.4 Molecular structure of conductors, semiconductors and insulators .................................................................................................................. 7 3.2 STATIC ELECTRICITY AND CONDUCTION.......................................................... …


i a r T

10

3.2.1 Static electricity and distribution of electrostatic charges ......................................................................................................................... 9 3.2.1.1Friction.....................................................................................................................

10

3.2.2 Electrostatic laws of attraction and repulsion ......................................................................................................................................... 10 3.2.3 Units of charge, Coulomb's Law............................................................................................................................................................. 13 3.2.4. Conduction of Electricity in solids, liquids, gases and vacuum .............................................................................................................. 13 3.3 ELECTRICAL TERMINOLOGY, UNIT AND AFFECTING FACTORS .......................................................................................................... 15 3.3.1 Potential Difference ................................................................................................................................................................................ 15 3.3.2 Electromotive Force (EMF) .................................................................................................................................................................... 17 3.3.3 Voltage ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 3.3.4 Current ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21 3.3.5 Resistance ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 3.3.6 Conductance .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 25 3.3.7 Electric Charge....................................................................................................................................................................................... 26


Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011 Page ii

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.3.8 Conventional Current Flow..................................................................................................................................................................... 26 3.3.9 Electron Flow.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 28 3.4 GENERATION OF ELECTRICITY ................................................................................................................................................................ 31

g n i n

3.4.1 Friction ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 33 3.4.2 Magnetism.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 35

i a r T

3.4.3 Heat........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 37 3.4.4 Pressure ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 39


3.4.5 Light ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 41 3.4.6. Chemical ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 43 3.5 DC SOURCES OF ELECTRICITY................................................................................................................................................................ 45 3.5.1 Basic chemical action............................................................................................................................................................................. 45 3.5.2 Primary and Secondary Cells ................................................................................................................................................................. 49 3.5.3 Cells connected in series and parallel .................................................................................................................................................... 50 3.5.3.1 Series Connection ..................................................................................................

54

3.5.3.2 Parallel Connection ................................................................................................

58

3.5.4 Internal resistance and its effect on a battery......................................................................................................................................... 55 3.5.4.1 Internal Resistance.................................................................................................

61

3.5.4.2 Effects of Internal Battery Resistance.....................................................................

65

3.5.5 Aircraft batteries ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 60


Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011 Page iii

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.5.5.1 The dry cell (Leclanché cell)........................................................................................................................................................... 61 3.5.5.2 Secondary cell ................................................................................................................................................................................ 65 3.5.5.3

Lead Acid Types......................................................................................................................................................................... 67

3.5.5.4 Lead Acid Battery Construction .................................................................................................................................................... 68

g n i n

3.5.5.5 Lead Acid Battery Construction .................................................................................................................................................... 69 3.5.5.6 Specific Gravity Test Procedure (HYDROMETER) ...................................................................................................................... 71

i a r T

3.5.5.7 Lead Acid Battery Inspection and Service .................................................................................................................................... 73


3.5.5.8 Alkaline Battery……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 76 3.5.5.9 Alkaline Battery Inspection ........................................................................................................................................................... 78 3.5.5.10 Battery Charging......................................................................................................................................................................... 79 3.5.6 Thermocouples....................................................................................................................................................................................... 81 3.5.6.1 System Operation......................................................................................................................................................................... 81 3.5.6.2

Types of Thermocouple ............................................................................................................................................................. 87

3.5.7 Photocells............................................................................................................................................................................................... 89 3.5.7.1 Construction of Photo-cells........................................................................................................................................................... 89 3.6 DIRECT CURRENT (DC) ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS (EASE Ref 3.6) Level 2............................................................................................... 95 3.6.1

Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 95

3.6.1.1 Simple circuit ................................................................................................................................................................................ 95 3.6.1.2 Power source, Voltage, current and resistance ............................................................................................................................ 97 3.6.1.3 Conductors ................................................................................................................................................................................... 97


Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011 Page iv

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.6.1.4 Series DC circuit........................................................................................................................................................................... 97 3.6.1.5 Schematic..................................................................................................................................................................................... 99 3.6.1.6 Parallel DC circuit ....................................................................................................................................................................... 100 3.6.2 Ohm’s Law ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 103

g n i n

3.6.2.1 Using equation ............................................................................................................................................................................... 97 3.6.2.2 An analogy for Ohm's Law.......................................................................................................................................................... 111 3.6.3

i a r T

Kirchhoff's Voltage and Current Law............................................................................................................................................... 115


3.6.3.1 Kirchhoff's Current Law .............................................................................................................................................................. 115 3.6.3.2 Kirchhoff's Current Law in action ................................................................................................................................................ 116 3.6.3.3 Kirchhoff's Voltage Law .............................................................................................................................................................. 117 3.6.3.4 Positive and Negative Signs in Kirchhoff's Voltage Law............................................................................................................. 119 3.6.4

Significance of the internal resistance of a supply ........................................................................................................................... 121

3.7 RESISTANCE AND RESISTOR (EASA Ref: 3.7) Level 1 and 2 ................................................................................................................ 125 3.7.1 Fundamentals....................................................................................................................................................................................... 125 3.7.1.1 (a) Resistance and affecting factors ............................................................................................................................................. 125 3.7.1.2 (a)

Variables Effecting Electrical Resistance ............................................................................................................................. 127

3.7.1.3 (b) Positive and negative temperature coefficient conductance ................................................................................................. 129 3.7.2 (a) Specific resistance ........................................................................................................................................................................ 130 3.7.3 ( a ) Resistor identification .................................................................................................................................................................. 138 3.7.3.1 ( a ) Resistor colour code ........................................................................................................................................................... 139


Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011 Page v

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.7.3.2 (a) Wattage ratings ..................................................................................................................................................................... 144 3.7.4 (a )

Resistors in series, parallel and series parallel combination ....................................................................................................... 147

3.7.4.1 (a) Resistors in series................................................................................................................................................................. 148 3.7.4.2 (a) Resistors in parallel............................................................................................................................................................... 152

g n i n

3.7.4.3 (a) Resistors in Series Parallel Combinations ............................................................................................................................ 157 3.7.5 (b) Fixed resistors............................................................................................................................................................................... 167

i a r T

3.7.6 (b) Tolerance and limitations .............................................................................................................................................................. 168


3.7.7 (b) Stability ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 168 3.7.8 (b) Methods of construction of Fixed Resistors .................................................................................................................................. 169 3.7.8.1 (b) Types of fixed resistors: Low power resistors ....................................................................................................................... 169 3.7.8.2 (b) Types of fixed resistors: High power resistors....................................................................................................................... 170 3.7.9 (b) Variable resistors .......................................................................................................................................................................... 171 3.7.9.1 (b)

Variable Resistors - Construction......................................................................................................................................... 172

3.7.9.2 (b) Construction of potentiometers ............................................................................................................................................. 177 3.7.10. (a)

Operation and use of potentiometers and rheostats ................................................................................................................. 181

3.7.11 (b) Thermistors ................................................................................................................................................................................. 188 3.7.11.1 Benefits of Using Thermistors .................................................................................................................................................... 189 3.7.12 (b) Voltage dependent resistors ....................................................................................................................................................... 189 3.7.13 (b)

Construction of Wheatstone bridge ............................................................................................................................................ 190

3.7.13.1 (a) Operation of Wheatstone bridge ......................................................................................................................................... 191


Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011 Page vi

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.7.13.2 (b) Applications of the Wheatstone bridge…………………………………….............................................................................. 192 3.8 POWER (EASA 3.8) Level 2 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 194 3.8.1 Power and Energy................................................................................................................................................................................ 195 3.8.2 Energy.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 195

g n i n

3.8.3 Power Formula ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 199 3.8.4 Maximum Power Transfer .................................................................................................................................................................... 201

i a r T

3.9 CAPACITANCE AND CAPACITOR (EASA Ref. 3.9) Level 2 ..................................................................................................................... 203


3.9.1 Operation and Function of a capacitor ................................................................................................................................................. 203 3.9.2

Factors affecting capacitance ......................................................................................................................................................... 215

3.9.3 Capacitor types, Construction, and Function........................................................................................................................................ 224 3.9.3.1 Polarized capacitors (large values, 1pF +) ................................................................................................................................. 225 3.9.3.2 Unpolarised capacitors (small values, up to 1pF) ....................................................................................................................... 228 3.9.4 Capacitor Color Coding ........................................................................................................................................................................ 237 3.9.5

Calculations of capacitance and voltage in series circuits and parallel circuits ................................................................................ 251

3.9.5.1 Capacitor in Series ..................................................................................................................................................................... 251 3.9.5.2 Capacitors in Parallel.................................................................................................................................................................. 255 3.9.6

Exponential charge and discharge of a capacitor ............................................................................................................................ 260

3.9.6.1 Charging a Capacitor.................................................................................................................................................................. 261 3.9.6.2 Discharging a Capacitor ............................................................................................................................................................. 266 3.10.9.3 (b) Magnetic Flux and Flux Density ........................................................................................................................................ 311


Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011 Page vii

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.10.9.4 (b) Permeability ........................................................................................................................................................................ 312 3.10.9.5 (b) Hysteresis loop.................................................................................................................................................................... 313 3.10.9.6 (b) Retentivity ........................................................................................................................................................................... 315 3.10.9.7 (b) Coercive force ..................................................................................................................................................................... 315

g n i n

3.10.9.8 (b) Reluctance .......................................................................................................................................................................... 316 3.10.9.9 (b) Saturation points ................................................................................................................................................................. 317

i a r T

3.10.9.10 (b) Eddy currents .................................................................................................................................................................... 319


3.10.10 (b)

Protection for care and storage of magnets ............................................................................................................................. 319

3.10.11 (b) Magnetic Field Strength/Flux Density Curve (B-H Curve) ......................................................................................................... 321 3.10.12 (b) Characteristics of Ferromagnetic Materials............................................................................................................................... 326 3.11 INDUCTANCE/INDUCTOR (EASA Ref 3.11) Level 2............................................................................................................................... 331 3.11.1 Electromagnetic Induction .................................................................................................................................................................. 331 3.11.2 Action of inducing a voltage in a conductor moving in a magnetic field.............................................................................................. 331 3.11.3.1 Effect of the following on the magnitude of an induced voltage: magnetic field strength ............................................................ 333 3.11.3.2 Effect of the following on the magnitude of an induced voltage: rate of change of flux .............................................................. 334 3.11.4 Force on a Current-carrying Conductor in a magnetic Field ............................................................................................................... 339 3.11.5 Lenz's Law ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 342 3.11.6 Polarity determining rules ................................................................................................................................................................... 345 3.11.7 Back EMF and Inductance ................................................................................................................................................................. 347 3.11.8 Saturation Point................................................................................................................................................................................ 350


Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011 Page viii

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.11.8.1 Time Constant .......................................................................................................................................................................... 354 3.11.8. 2 Inductance in Series and Parallel ............................................................................................................................................ 361 3.11.9 Mutual Induction ............................................................................................................................................................................... 367 Refer Figure 182, .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 369

g n i n

3.11.9.1 The effect the rate of change of primary current and mutual inductance has on induced emf ................................................... 371 Factors affecting Mutual Inductance......................................................................................................................................................... 371

i a r T

3.11.10 Principle Uses of Inductors............................................................................................................................................................... 372


3.11.10.1 Types of Inductors .................................................................................................................................................................. 372 3.11.10.2 Types of Cores ....................................................................................................................................................................... 374 3.12 DC MOTOR / GENERATOR THEORY (EASA Ref 3.12) Level 2............................................................................................................. 377 3.12.1 Basic Generator Theory ..................................................................................................................................................................... 377 3.12.1.1 Basic DC Generator ................................................................................................................................................................... 381 3.12.1.2 Principle of DC Generator ........................................................................................................................................................ 382 3.12.2 Construction and Components in a DC Generator ............................................................................................................................. 386 3.12.2.1 Commutation .............................................................................................................................................................................. 393 3.12.2.2 Armature Reaction...................................................................................................................................................................... 397 3.12.3 Types of DC Generators .................................................................................................................................................................... 399 3.12.3.1 Series –wound DC Generator .................................................................................................................................................... 399 3.12.3.2 Shunt-wound DC Generator ....................................................................................................................................................... 401 3.12.3.3 Compound wound Generator ..................................................................................................................................................... 403


Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011 Page ix

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.12.3.4 Generator Ratings and Terms .................................................................................................................................................. 405 3.12.4 Basic Motor Theory .......................................................................................................................................................................... 409 3.12.4.1 Fleming’s Left Hand Rule ........................................................................................................................................................... 413 3.12.4.2 Action of a Basic Electric Motor ................................................................................................................................................ 415

g n i n

3.12.5 A Practical DC Motor........................................................................................................................................................................ 416 3.12.5.1 Back emf .................................................................................................................................................................................... 416

i a r T

3.12.5.2 Torque ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 418


3.12.5.3 Power ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 419 3.12.5.4 Reactive Sparking and Armature Reaction................................................................................................................................. 419 3.12.5.5 Speed control of a DC motor ...................................................................................................................................................... 421 3.12.5.6 Reversal of Rotation of a DC Motor............................................................................................................................................ 422 3.12.6 Types of DC Motors ........................................................................................................................................................................... 424 3.12.6.1 Series Motor ............................................................................................................................................................................... 425 3.12.6.2 Shunt Motor ................................................................................................................................................................................ 427 3.12.6.3 Compound Wound Motor ........................................................................................................................................................... 429 3.12.7 Starter Generator ............................................................................................................................................................................... 433 13 AC THEORY................................................................................................................................................................................................ 435 3.13.1 Fundamentals..................................................................................................................................................................................... 435 3.13.2 AC Generation.................................................................................................................................................................................... 435 3.13.3 Waveform and Instantaneous Value .................................................................................................................................................. 439


Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011 Page x

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.13.4 Sine Wave Characteristics ................................................................................................................................................................. 445 3.13.4.1 Peak Value ................................................................................................................................................................................. 445 3.13.4.2 Peak--to--Peak Value ................................................................................................................................................................. 447 3.13.4.3 Root Mean Square Value ........................................................................................................................................................... 449

g n i n

3.13.4.4 Period and Cycle ........................................................................................................................................................................ 453 3.13.4.5 Frequency .................................................................................................................................................................................. 455

i a r T

3.13.4.6 Angular Velocity.......................................................................................................................................................................... 465


3.13.4.7 Phase ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 467 3.13.4.8 Phase Difference ........................................................................................................................................................................ 469 3.13.5 Triangular/Square waves ................................................................................................................................................................... 471 3.13.6 Single/ Three phase principles ........................................................................................................................................................... 475 3.14 RESISTIVE (R), CAPACITIVE (C) AND INDUCTIVE (L) CIRCUITS (EASA 3.14) LEVEL 2 .................................................................... 481 3.14.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................................................... 481 3.14.1.1 Pure Resistance in AC Circuits................................................................................................................................................... 481 3.14.1.2 Power in Pure Resistive Circuits................................................................................................................................................. 483 3.14.1.3 Pure Inductance in AC Circuits................................................................................................................................................... 487 3.14.1.4 Power in Pure Inductive Circuits................................................................................................................................................. 489 3.14.1.5 Pure Capacitance in AC Circuits ............................................................................................................................................... 491 3.14.1.6 Power in Pure Capacitive Circuits .............................................................................................................................................. 493 3.14.2 Resistor and Inductor in Series ......................................................................................................................................................... 495


Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011 Page xi

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.14.3 Resistor and Capacitor in Series ...................................................................................................................................................... 499 3.14.4 Resistor, Inductor and Capacitor in Series ....................................................................................................................................... 504 3.14.5 Series Resonance ............................................................................................................................................................................ 507 3.14.7 Parallel Resonance ............................................................................................................................................................................ 515

g n i n

3.14.8 Power in an AC Circuits ..................................................................................................................................................................... 520 3.14.8.1 True or Real, Apparent and Reactive Power .............................................................................................................................. 523

i a r T

3.14.8.2 Power Factor .............................................................................................................................................................................. 525


3.15 TRANSFORMER (EASA Ref. 3.15) Level 2 ......................................................................................................................................... 42527 3.15.1 Transformer principles, construction, and operation........................................................................................................................... 423 3.15.1.1 Transformer Principles ............................................................................................................................................................... 423 3.15.1.2

Basic Construction of a Transformer ....................................................................................................................................... 424

3.15.2 Basic Operation of a Transformer ...................................................................................................................................................... 427 3.15.2.1 Schematic Symbols for Transformers........................................................................................................................................ 428 3.15.3 Transformer losses............................................................................................................................................................................. 429 3.15.4 Methods of overcoming losses ........................................................................................................................................................... 430 3.15.5 Transformer action Under No Load and On Load Conditions ............................................................................................................ 432 3.15.6 Transformer Connections and Polarity Marking ................................................................................................................................. 435 3.15.7 Efficiency and Regulation ................................................................................................................................................................... 437 3.15.8 Three Phase Transformers ................................................................................................................................................................ 438 3.15.9 Turns Ratio......................................................................................................................................................................................... 442


Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011 Page xii

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.15.10 Autotransformers.............................................................................................................................................................................. 445 3.16 FILTERS (EASA Ref 3.16) Level 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 448 3.16.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................... 56548 3.16.2 The Cut-off Frequency ................................................................................................................................................................. 56950

g n i n

3.16.3 Operation, application and uses: low-pass..................................................................................................................................... 57051 3.16.4 Operation, application and uses: high-pass ................................................................................................................................. 57553 3.16.5

i a r T

Operation, application and uses: band-pass ............................................................................................................................... 57958


3.16.6 Operation, application and uses of the following filters: band stop............................................................................................... 58260 3.17 AC GENERATORS (EASA Ref 3.17) Level 2...................................................................................................................................... 58563 3.17.1 Rotation of a Loop in a Magnetic Field and Waveform Produced................................................................................................. 58563 3.17.2 Rotating-Armature Alternators....................................................................................................................................................... 58563 3.17.3 Rotating-Field Alternators............................................................................................................................................................. 59169 3.17.4 Three Phase Star and Delta Connections ...................................................................................................................................... 59575 3.17.5 Permanent Magnet Generator....................................................................................................................................................... 59978 3.17.6 Prime Movers ................................................................................................................................................................................ 60180 3.17.7 Alternator Rotors ........................................................................................................................................................................... 60180 3.17.8 Alternator Characteristics and Limitations ..................................................................................................................................... 60382 3.17.9 Power in a Three Phase System ................................................................................................................................................... 60483 3.18 AC MOTORS (EASA Ref 3.18) Level 2 ................................................................................................................................................ 60685 3.18.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................... 60785


Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011 Page xiii

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.18.2

Rotating Magnetic Fields........................................................................................................................................................... 60986

3.18.2.1 Two-Phase Rotating Magnetic Fields ................................................................................................................................... 60986 3.18.2.2 Three-Phase Rotating Fields .................................................................................................................................................. 61389 3.18.2.3 Rotor Behavior in a Rotating Field.......................................................................................................................................... 61590

g n i n

3.18.3 Construction, Principles of operation and Characteristics of AC Synchronous Motor .................................................................... 61792 3.18.4 Construction , Principles of operation and Characteristics of AC Induction Motor......................................................................... 62196

i a r T

3.18.5 Two Phase Induction Motor................................................................................................................................................................ 500


3.18.6 Single-Phase Induction Motors........................................................................................................................................................... 501 3.18.6.1 Single-phase Induction Motors ................................................................................................................................................... 503 3.18.6.2 Split-phase Induction Motor........................................................................................................................................................ 504 3.18.6.3 Split-Phase Induction Motors...................................................................................................................................................... 506 3.18.6.4 Capacitor-Start .......................................................................................................................................................................... 506 3.18.6.5 Resistance-Start ......................................................................................................................................................................... 508 3.18.6.6 Shaded-Pole Induction Motors ................................................................................................................................................... 510 3.18.7 Speed of Single-Phase Induction Motors ........................................................................................................................................... 514 3.18.8 Speed Control of AC Motor ............................................................................................................................................................... 515


Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011 Page xiv

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS ELECTRON THEORY (DCAM 3.1 L1)

3.1 ELECTRON THEORY (EASA Ref: 3.1) Level 1

3.1.1 Atomic Structure

i a r T

An atom is the smallest part of an element (e.g. carbon, copper, silver) and is built up such as a small solar system.


g n i n

The nucleus in its centre consists of protons and neutrons. Spinning around the nucleus are the electrons. The structure of the nucleus and the number of spinning electrons decide the type of element. The nucleus of the atom and the electrons has different electric charges as shown in Figure 1: •

the protons are positively charged

•

the electrons are negatively charged

•

the neutrons are electrically neutral.

These different electrical charges create forces which combine to hold the atom together. Protons and neutrons comprise almost the total mass of an atom.


Issue 1 Revision 2 June 2011 Page 1



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 1: The Atomic Structure




3.1.2 Atomic Number

The number of planetary electrons in an atom varies with the element and gives the atomic number of the element.

i a r T

g n i n

Figure 2 shows two examples of atomic structures. The atomic number of carbon is six, indicating that the carbon atom has six electrons in orbit. Copper has an atomic number of 29 and therefore contains 29 electrons. An atom under normal conditions is electrically neutral. The


numbers of electrons and protons are equal and, since the negative charge of an electron is neutralized by the equal positive charge on a proton, the atom as a whole has zero charge.

The neutron increases the mass of the atom but does not contribute to its charge. The chemical and electrical characteristics of an element (atom) depend upon the action of ’free’ electrons. ’Free’ electrons are those electrons that appear in the outermost orbit (shell) of an atom as depicted in Figure 3.




f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M FIGURE 2: Atomic Number of Elements

i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 3: Free Electrons of Atoms




3.1.3 Ionisation

g n i n

Atoms are affected by many outside forces such as heat, light, electric fields, magnetic fields and chemical reaction. Often the balanced state of the atom is upset by one or more of these forces. As a result an atom can lose or gain an outer electron. When this happens the atom is no longer in a neutral state, and becomes an ion.


i a r T

Figure 4, (detail a) shows an atom that is neutral because it contains an equal number of protons and electrons. Figure 4, (detail b) shows the condition that exists when an atom loses an electron. The atom now has one more proton than electrons. Thus there is one positive charge that is not cancelled by a negative charge. Therefore the atom has a net positive charge and is known as a ’positive ion’. If an atom has ’collected’ a stray electron there is one negative charge which is not offset by a corresponding positive charge. Therefore the atom has a net negative charge and is known as a negative ion Figure 4, (detail c).

In certain materials these outer electrons are so weakly bound to their nucleus that they can easily be forced away and left to wonder among other atoms at random. Such electrons are the ’free’ electrons as described before. The movement of ’free’ electrons allow electric current to flow.





i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 4: Ionisation of Atoms




3.1.4 Molecular structure of conductors, semiconductors and insulators

3.1.4.1 Conductors and Insulators

i a r T

g n i n

A conductor is a substance in which there is a constant exchange of ’free’ electrons between atoms. Pure metals are good conductors, silver being the best and copper ranking second.


An insulator is a substance in which there is practically no random movement of ’free’ electrons. In this case the outer orbital electrons are tightly bound to their parent nuclei and will not normally break away. Good insulators are: •

porcelain

•

mica

•

ebonite

•

dry air

•

rubber.

No firm line can be drawn between conductors and insulators. Silver is a very good conductor; rubber is a very good insulator. Between these extremes lies a group of material which are neither good insulators nor conductors. This group is termed semi--conductors. Semi--conductors possess some very important properties, which are used in transistors and other solid state devices. Figure 5 shows groups of conductor, semiconductor and insulator. For Training Purposes Only




i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 5: Conductors and Insulators



PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS STATIC ELECTRICITY AND CONDUCTION (DCAM 3.2 L2)

3.2 STATIC ELECTRICITY AND CONDUCTION 3.2.1 Static electricity and distribution of electrostatic charges 3.2.1.1Friction

i a r T

g n i n

A good example to explain static electricity is, to generate electricity by friction. This is done by separating electrons from their parent atoms. If


two different materials are rubbed together, electrons may be forced out of their orbits in one material and transferred to the other material.

The material which captures electrons acquires a negative charge of course. The material which loses electrons acquires a positive charge. The resulting distribution of electric charges is known as static electricity. Both materials retain the static charges they have acquired, until something occurs to ’discharge’ them. Materials easily acquire a charge of static electricity include glass, amber, hard rubber, waxes, flannel, silk, rayon and nylon.

Example:

When a hard rubber rod is rubbed with fur, the fur loses electrons to the rod. The rod becomes negatively charged and the fur positively charged.


Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011 Page 9


NOTES

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M For Training Purposes Only

i a r T

g n i n



3.2.2 Electrostatic laws of attraction and repulsion

g n i n

There is a basic law which states that, like charges repel and unlike charges attract (coulomb’s law). Because like charges repel, two electrons repel each other Figure 6, (detail a) as do two protons Figure 6, (detail b). It can be seen how the lines of force interact between two electrons or protons. The next effect is that the electrons or protons attempt to move apart.


i a r T

In Figure 6, (detail c) an electron and a proton are shown. Here, the two fields interact in such a way that the two charges attract and tend to move together. Coulombs law holds true for concentration of charges as well.

A shortage of electrons causes a positive charge and is called a positive potential. An excess of electrons causes a negative charge or negative potential.





i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 6: Behaviour of Like and Unlike Charges




3.2.3 Units of charge, Coulomb's Law

g n i n

The charge of an electron (or proton) is extremely small and is inconvenient for practical measurements. The practical unit of charge or quantity of electricity is the coulomb. The symbol for coulomb is Q. A charge of one coulomb is equal to the charge of 6.29 x 1018 electrons.

i a r T

A difference in potential (voltage) will cause electrons to flow from the negative potential to the positive potential if a conductor is connected


between the two potentials. The electrons are in effect attracted or pulled to the positive potential and repelled or pushed away from the negative potential.

3.2.4. Conduction of Electricity in solids, liquids, gases and vacuum

Solids – Electrons

Liquids – Ions (both positives and negatives)

Gases or Vacuum – (both electrons and ions)

Refer Figure 7,

Current flows in solid. A free electron travels only a short distance before it combine with the positive ion Current flows in gas. Both electrons and ions serve as current carrier.




Direction of Current


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 7: Conduction of Electricity in Solids, liquids, gases and vacuum



PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS ELECTRICAL TERMINOLOGY, UNIT AND AFFECTING FACTORS (DCAM 3.3 L2)

3.3 ELECTRICAL TERMINOLOGY, UNIT AND AFFECTING FACTORS 3.3.1 Potential Difference

g n i n

The difference between positive and negative charge is called a potential difference (PD) and is measured in Volts (V). Figure 8,

i a r T

(detail a) shows a PD of 100 V between a positive charge and a neutral charge, whereby the neutral charge is negative with respect to the positive charge.


In Figure 8, (detail b) a PD of 100 V between a neutral charge and a negative charge is shown. The neutral charge is positive with respect to the negative charge. A PD of 200 V is shown on Figure 8, (detail c) between a negative charge of -100 Volts and a positive charge of +100 V.

The neutral charge between positive and negative is negative with respect to +100 V and positive with respect to -100 V. A difference in potential (voltage) will cause electrons to flow from the negative potential to the positive potential if a conductor is connected between the two potentials. The electrons are in effect attracted or pulled to the positive potential and repelled or pushed away from the negative potential.





i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 8: Potential Differences




3.3.2 Electromotive Force (EMF)

g n i n

An electromotive force (EMF) is an electrical pressure that is able to force electrons to move a current flow around a circuit. This means that a cell, battery or generator can generate an EMF that can force a current to flow around a circuit.


i a r T

A simple closed electrical circuit such as a conductor and a lamp connected between the terminals of a battery provides two concurrent energy transformations. Chemical energy is converted to electrical energy by the battery, and electrical energy is converted to light energy in the lamp.

Note: Beside the light energy a part of the electrical energy is converted into heat energy that is also radiated by the lamp.

Figure 9 shows a simple electric circuit which consists of a battery, a switch and a resistor (component that consumes energy). The battery generates an EMF to force a current flow when the switch is closed. In this case, a potential difference (PD) exists across the resistor. The PD is the difference in electrical pressure or voltage between two points.





i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 9: Electromotive Force (EMF)




The EMF can only be measured when no current flows Figure 10, (detail a). When current flows, the EMF cannot be measured, only the PD can be determined. The reason for this is that a voltage is dropped across the internal resistor of the battery Figure 10, (detail b).

When a current flows is:

When no current flows is:

EMF = PD + internal voltage drop.

EMF = PD

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M EMF and PD are both measured in volts (V).

i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 10: Electromotive Force (EMF) and Potential Difference (PD)




3.3.3 Voltage

Voltage is an electrical pressure which causes an electric current to flow through a complete electric circuit as shown as shown in Figure 11. Electric potential is energy per unit charge. Measured in joules per coulomb (= volts)


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 11: Voltage




3.3.4 Current

g n i n

Current is the flow of electrons from a negative charge to a positive charge. In order to measure current flow, the number of electrons passing a point in a specific time must be measured. This measurement requires a unit and is known as the ampere (A). 18

One coulomb is equal to 6.29 x 10

electrons. An ampere is equal to one coulomb per second.

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M 18

When 6.29 x 10

i a r T

electrons flow through a wire each second, the current flow is one ampere. If twice the numbers of electrons flow each

second, the current is two amperes. This relationship is expressed by the equation: Q (coulombs) = I (ampères) x t (seconds) or I =Q/t (ampères)

The symbol for quantity of current is I. The unit of current (to measure current) is ampere (A). The name ’ampere‘is often shortened to ’Amp ‘and is further abbreviated to ‘A‘. Often, the ampere is a too large unit. In these cases metric prefixes are used to denote smaller units. One thousandth (0.001) of an ampere is one milli-ampere (1 mA). One millionth (0.000001) of an ampere is one microampere (1 µA). The rate of flow of electrons can be in one of three forms known as direct current (DC), pulsating current and alternating current (AC).

A direct current is formed when an electric current is flowing continuously in one direction at a steady rate Figure 12, (detail a). A pulsating current is formed when current flows in one direction, but undergoes regular, recurring variations in magnitude Figure 12, (detail b).




An alternating current is formed by an electric current which alternatively reverses its direction in a circuit in a regular manner. One cycle is a complete variation Figure 12, (detail c). The number of such cycles occurring in one second is termed frequency. The unit of frequency is the hertz (Hz).


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 12: Forms of Current




3.3.5 Resistance

g n i n

Resistance is a property which opposes current flow. Some materials such as glass and rubber, offer a great deal of opposition to current flow; they are said to have ’a very high resistance’. Other materials, such as silver or copper, offer very little opposition to current flow. Therefore they have ’a very low resistance’. The schematic symbol of resistance is R.


The unit of resistance is the Ohm ( ).

For smaller and larger resistance values the following terms are used: 1

i a r T

1000000 Ohm = 1 micro-Ohm = 1 µ 1

1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm

= 1 milli-Ohm

=1m

= 1 kilo-Ohm

=1 k

1000000 Ohm = 1 Mega-Ohm =1 M

Resistance is deliberately added to electric circuits to limit currents or to divide voltages. The devices used to add known resistance to a circuit are called resistors.

Resistors in circuit diagrams are sketched down by symbols as shown in Figure 13. For Training Purposes Only




i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 13: Resistor Symbols




Three factors affecting resistance:

1. Length of resistance material, whereby the resistance is proportional to length. 2. Cross--sectional area of resistance, whereby the resistance is inversely proportional to cross--sectional area. 3. Resistance material. Each material has a characteristic resistance or resistivity (symbol 2

of a metre length of material with a cross--sectional area of one millimetre squared (1 mm ).


3.3.6 Conductance

g n i n

pronounced rho). Rho is normally the resistance

i a r T

Conductance is the opposite of resistance and is defined as the ease with which a material passes current. Conductance is the reciprocal of resistance:

Conductance =

1

Resistance

The unit of conductance is the Siemens (S). Therefore is G = 1

or R = 1

R

G




3.3.7 Electric Charge

Electric charge is a characteristic of subatomic particle that will gives materials their electromagnetic properties.

A nucleus consists of neutron, proton and electron which have their properties of electric charge as below:


Proton – Positive charge

Electron – Negative charge

i a r T

g n i n

Neutron – Zero charge / Neutral




3.3.8 Conventional Current Flow The direction of moving positive charge opposite from electron flow. Refer Figure 14. The direction of conventional current is the direction of positive charges in motion


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 14: Conventional Current Flow




3.3.9 Electron Flow

g n i n

The direction of the electron drift is from the negative side of the battery to the positive side via a local resistance (R) as in Figure 15.

While in Figure 16, the electrons inside the battery move from the positive terminal to the negative terminal because of the potential difference


i a r T

FIGURE 15: Electron Flow




NOTES


i a r T

g n i n




i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 16: Electron Flow



PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS GENERATION OF ELECTRICITY (DCAM 3.4 L1)

3.4 GENERATION OF ELECTRICITY

g n i n

For an electron to move (electric current), it must be given force from somewhere. This force is converted into electricity when electrons move. The six basic means to bring about the movement of electrons and thus generate electricity are friction, magnetism, and heat, and pressure, light and chemical action.


Figure 17 shows all methods available to generate electricity.


i a r T




i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 17: Sources of Electricity Generation




3.4.1 Friction

A good example to explain static electricity is, to generate electricity by friction. This is done by separating electrons from their parent atoms.

g n i n

If two different materials are rubbed together, electrons may be forced out of their orbits in one material and transferred to the other material.

i a r T

The material which captures electrons acquires a negative charge of course. The material which loses electrons acquires a positive charge. The resulting distribution of electric charges is known as static electricity. Both materials retain the static charges they have acquired, until


something occurs to ’discharge’ them. Materials easily acquire a charge of static electricity include glass, amber, hard rubber, waxes, flannel, silk, rayon and nylon.

In Figure 18, when a hard rubber rod is rubbed with fur, the fur loses electrons to the rod. The rod becomes negatively charged and the fur positively charged.





i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 18: Generation of Static Electricity by Friction




3.4.2 Magnetism

The movement of a magnet in a coil causes an induced voltage in the latter as in Figure 19. This depends on the direction of the magnet field

g n i n

and the speed of movement of the magnet in the coil. When a bar magnet is moved into and out of a coil a measuring instrument connected to the coil indicates a voltage (induced voltage).This process is called induction shown in Figure 20.

i a r T

During the induction process, mechanical energy is converted into electrical energy. The direction of the induced voltage depends on the


direction of movement of the magnet and on the direction of the magnet field. The value of the induced voltage increases with the speed of the magnet. The generation of induced voltages can be explained by the fact that the ’free’ electrons, present in the wire of the coil, are moved by the movement of the magnet towards one end of the coil if the magnetic flux increases.

FIGURE 19: Induced Voltage





i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 20: Induction Process




3.4.3 Heat

Refer to Figure 21

g n i n

A thermo--electric effect is caused by heat being applied to two conductors of different metals (e.g. iron and copper) connected together. The

i a r T

generated voltage depends upon the material used and the difference in temperature between the hot and the cold junctions.


The thermo--electric effect is used to measure temperature in a thermocouple instrument of engines, exhaust gases, ovens and furnaces.

It can be also used to measure current flow (the current heats a resistor in which the hot junction is placed) where direct measurement of a current (radio frequency currents for example) is not possible.


Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011

Page 37



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 21: Thermoelectric Effect



Page 38


3.4.4 Pressure

Refer to Figure 22

i a r T

g n i n

When a quartz plate is compressed, electric charges are generated on its faces. Tension generates charges of the opposite sign. This effect is known as electro-striction or piezoelectric effect. This electro-striction or piezoelectric property is reciprocal.


When a voltage is applied between two faces of quartz it contracts or expands a little, according to which face is made positive and which is made negative. These effects are used for transmission and reception of ultrasonic vibrations in water (sonar, echo sounder).



Page 39



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 22: Piezoelectric Effect



Page 40


3.4.5 Light

Refer to Figure 23

i a r T

g n i n

A photo--electric effect occurs when light strikes a photo voltaic material and causes electrons to be emitted. The result is an electric voltage. This effect is used in photo--diodes, photo--transistors, solar cells and silicon cells.



Page 41



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 23: Photoelectric Effect



Page 42


3.4.6. Chemical

Refer to Figure 24

i a r T

g n i n

Dissimilar substances have opposite polarities with respect to one another and that, when two such substances are rubbed together, one will have a positive charge and the other a negative charge.


Dissimilar metals also have this property, and when two such metals are placed in contact with each other, there will be a momentary flow of electrons from the one having a negative characteristic to the one having a more positive characteristic.

If two plates of dissimilar metals are placed in a chemical solution called an electrolyte, opposite electric charges will be established on plate A and plate B. The result is an electrical voltage (potential difference).



Page 43



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 24: Chemical Effect



Page 44

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS DC SOURCES OF ELECTRICITY (DCAM 3.5 L2)

3.5 DC SOURCES OF ELECTRICITY 3.5.1 Basic chemical action

Refer to Figure 25

i a r T

g n i n

If two plates of dissimilar metals are placed in a chemical solution called an electrolyte, opposite electric charges will be established on plate A and plate B. The result is an electrical voltage (potential difference). This arrangement of plates in an electrolyte is known as simple cell. If two


or more cells are connected in series a battery is created. All cells and batteries use some form of electrolyte. If certain substances are dissolved in water they will ionise, i.e. they will give off positive and negative ions. This is known as electrolytic dissociation. These substances are known as electrolytes, and conduct electric current. Electrolytes used in cells or batteries are either acids or alkaline.

The relationship between dissimilar metals is known as the electrochemical series. If two electrodes made of different materials are immersed in an electrolyte, an electrical voltage is formed between them. Example:

The voltage of a Zn - Cu cell.

Potential (voltage) of the Cu electrode = +0.34 V. Potential (voltage) of the Zn electrode = - 0.76 V. The voltage (potential difference) of this cell is: +0.34 V - (- 0.76 V) = 1.1 V



Page 45



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 25: Electrochemical Series



Page 46


Refer to Figure 26 and 27

A simple cell comprises zinc and a copper electrode immersed in a solution of sulphuric acid electrolyte. The function of the cell is to provide a

g n i n

source of DC power. The cell achieves this by an energy conversion process which converts chemical energy into electrical energy.

i a r T

As the zinc dissolves in the acid, positive ions move towards the copper electrode, causing the zinc to become negative with respect to the


electrolyte. The positive ions attach themselves to the copper electrode, causing it to be positive with respect to the electrolyte. In electrical engineering a negative electrode is called cathode and a positive electrode is called anode.

A potential difference of approximately 1 V then exists between the anode and the cathode. The potential difference depends on the plate (or electrode) materials. The voltage of the various materials is listed in the electro--chemical series.

If an electrical connection is now made between the anode and cathode, the potential difference existing across will cause a current flow in the external circuit. The current flow is proportional to the plate area (and to a lesser extent internal resistance and temperature). More zinc will dissolve and ions will continue to pass through the electrolyte to the copper. Electrons will flow in the external circuit from zinc to copper, while the conventional current flows from copper to zinc

An electric current will continue to flow in the external circuit until one of several things happen: •

all the zinc has been dissolved or

•

the electrolyte has become exhausted i.e. the supply of ions has been used up.

Once one more of these conditions have arisen the cell will no longer generate electric current and its useful life is finished. For Training Purposes Only


Page 47


When a cell is generating an electric current, bubbles of hydrogen gas form at the anode. A film of hydrogen is slowly formed and acts as a barrier to the chemical process. After a certain time the barrier effectively becomes a kind of insulator preventing further current passing. This has the effect of causing reduced potential difference across the anode and cathode and increased internal resistance of the cell or battery.

g n i n

The formation of a film of hydrogen at the anode of a cell when it is connected to an external circuit is termed polarization.

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M FIGURE 26: Unloaded Simple Cell


i a r T

FIGURE 27: Loaded Simple Cell Issue 1 Revision 0 Jan 2011

Page 48


3.5.2 Primary and Secondary Cells

Cells or batteries fall into two classes: •

primary cells

•

Secondary cells.


i a r T

g n i n

Primary cells are not re-chargeable. These cells are generally sealed units which must be disposed of as scrap when they become discharged. Secondary cells are re-chargeable units which can be regularly serviced to restore the chemical energy. When discharged the cells are connected to an electrical supply of suitable voltage and current.

A primary cell is one in which the chemical reaction eats away one of the electrodes, usually the negative electrode. When this happens, the electrode must be replaced or the cell must be discarded. In this galvanic-type cell, the zinc electrode and the liquid electrolyte usually replaced when this happen. In the case of dry cell, it is usually cheaper to buy a new cell.



Page 49


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 50


3.5.3 Cells connected in series and parallel

3.5.3.1 Series Connection

g n i n

Positive of one cell connected to negative of the next cell. Higher output voltage and capacity output of one cell only (remains the same) Example:

i a r T

A 12V lead acid battery contains 6 cells connected in series with each cell having a potential difference of 2V.

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M FIGURE 28: Cells Connected in Series



Page 51



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 29: Schematic Diagram: Cells in Series



Page 52


3.5.3.2 Parallel Connection

g n i n

Cells or batteries connected in parallel have their like terminals connected together. Positive of one cell connected to the positive of the next cell. Negative of one cell connected to the negative of the next cell The overall voltage remains the same The parallel connection is

i a r T

equivalent to the increasing the size of the electrodes and electrolyte, which increase the current capacity

E.g. two 12-V lead acid batteries were connected in parallel; overall voltage is 12V and twice the current capacity.

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M FIGURE 30: Cells in Parallel



Page 53



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 31: Cells Connected in Parallel



Page 54


3.5.4 Internal resistance and its effect on a battery 3.5.4.1 Internal Resistance

g n i n

Any source of supply must posses some ’Internal Resistance’ (Ri) and when a current flows in the circuit a voltage drop is developed across this internal resistance. The internal resistance of the supply is 0.5

and the external resistance of the circuit is 5.5

The total resistance of the circuit is:


RT= Ri + R1 RT= 0.5

+ 5.5

RT= 6

i a r T

. Refer Figure 32.

The total current through the circuit is: IT = EMF / RT IT = 12 V / 6 IT = 2 A



Page 55


Therefore two amperes have flowed through the two resistances in series developing a voltage drop each.

URi = IT x Ri URi = 2 A x 0.5 URi = 1 V


The polarity of URi is as shown in Figure 32 and is such as to subtract from the EMF.

i a r T

g n i n

The terminal voltage (PD) of the supply (sometimes named applied voltage) between terminals ’A’ and ’B’ is therefore:

PD= EMF − URi PD= 12 V − 1 V PD= 11 V

The current IT is checked again by the use of PD and R1:

IT = PD / R1

IT = 11 V / 5.5 IT = 2 A



Page 56


When a current is taken from a supply, the PD is equal to the EMF minus the voltage drop across the internal resistance of the supply.

EMF = PD + URi EMF = IT x RT PD = IT x R (external resistance)


i a r T

g n i n


Page 57



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 32: Internal Resistance



Page 58


3.5.4.2 Effects of Internal Battery Resistance


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 33: Effects of Internal Battery Resistance



Page 59


3.5.5 Aircraft batteries

A battery is a device composed of two or more cells that convert chemical energy into electrical energy

The chemical nature of the battery components provides: •

An excess of electrons at one terminal

•

A deficiency at the other


i a r T

g n i n

When the two terminals are joined by a conductor, electrons flow causes the chemical composition of the active material changes Battery output – a steady D.C. voltage.

In an aircraft, batteries are used for APU starting and to provide standby power for the aircraft.



Page 60


3.5.5.1 The dry cell

The dry cell is the most popular type of primary cell. It is ideal for simple applications where an inexpensive and non-critical source of

g n i n

electricity is all that is needed. The dry cell is not actually dry. The electrolyte is not in a liquid state, but is a moist paste. If it should become totally dry, it would no longer be able to transform energy to electrical energy.

i a r T

The construction of a common type of dry cell is shown in Figure 34A. These dry cells are also referred as Leclanche’ cells. The internal parts


of the cell are located in a cylindrical zinc container. The zinc container serves as the negative electrode (cathode) of the cell. The container is lined with a non-conducting material, such as blotting paper, to separate the zinc from the paste. A carbon electrode is located in the centre, and it serves as the positive terminal (anode) of the cell. The paste is a mixture of several substances such as ammonium chloride, powdered coke, ground carbon, manganese dioxide, zinc chloride, graphite and water.

The electrolyte paste also serves to hold the anode rigid in the centre of the cell. When the paste is packed in the cell, a small space is left at the top for expansion of the electrolyte paste caused by the depolarisation action. The cell is then sealed with a cardboard or plastic seal. Since the zinc container is the cathode, it must be protected with some insulating materials to be electrically isolated. Therefore, it is common practice for the manufacturer to enclose the cells in cardboard and metal containers.

The action of the water and the ammonium chloride in the paste, together with the zinc and carbon electrodes, produces the voltage of the cell. Manganese dioxide is added to reduce polarization when current flows and zinc chloride reduces local action when the cell is not being used.



Page 61


A cell that is not being used (sitting on the shelf) will gradually deteriorate because of slow internal chemical changes (local action) this deterioration is usually very slow if cells are properly stored. If unused cells are stored in cool place, their shelf life will be greatly preserved. Therefore, to minimize deterioration, they should be stored in refrigerated spaces. The cell is sealed at the top to keep air from entering and drying the electrolyte. Care should be taken to prevent breaking this seal.


i a r T

g n i n


Page 62


The Leaclanche’ Cell

The dry cell, invented in 1867 by the French engineer Georges Leclanché (1839 - 1889)

Widely used as a source of electric energy in: •

electric torches

•

small appliances such as transistor radios.


Once it is discharged it cannot be recharged, and must be discarded.


i a r T

g n i n


Page 63



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 34: Dry cell, cross sectional view



Page 64


3.5.5.2 Secondary cell

Batteries consisting of secondary cells are called storage batteries. The chemical action that releases electron flow is reversible (can be

g n i n

recharged or restored). Secondary cells do not produce electrical energy, but store it in chemical form. Secondary cells can be charged and discharged many times before they deteriorate to the point at which they must be discharged.

E.g. Lead-Acid Batteries and Nickel-Cadmium Batteries


i a r T


Page 65



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 35: Theory of the Lead Acid Cell



Page 66


3.5.5.3

Lead Acid Types

•

Positive plates made of lead peroxide (PbO2)

•

Negative plates made of pure spongy lead (Pb)

•

Electrolyte 30% sulphuric acid and 70% distilled water


i a r T

g n i n

Separators are used to keep the plate separated thus prevent internal short circuit. The material of the separators must be very porous to offer minimum resistance to the current passing through. The separators are saturated with electrolyte.

FIGURE 36: Lead acid battery



Page 67


3.5.5.4 Lead Acid Battery Construction

•

A lead acid battery consists of group of lead-acid cells connected in series.

•

Each cells of a storage battery has positive and negative plates.

•

A positive plate group consists of a number of positive plates connected to a plate strap.

•

A negative group also connected in the same manner.

•

These two groups meshed together with the separators between the positive and negative plates.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 37: Lead acid battery construction



Page 68


3.5.5.5 Lead Acid Battery Operation

g n i n

When the cell elements are assembled, they are placed in the cell container (made of hard rubber or plastic composition)

Cover made of material similar to cell container, sealed in with a special sealing compound to prevent spillage and loss of electrolyte.

i a r T

The cell ventilation cap is necessary to provide a means where by gasses can escape. The type of cell construction permits the electrolyte to circulate freely and also provides a path for sediment to settle at the bottom of the cell. When an external circuit is connected to a fully charged


cell, electron flows from the negative lead plates, via the circuit to the positive lead peroxide plates.

As an electron arriving at the positive plates, from the external circuit, drive negative oxygen ions from the lead peroxide into the electrolyte. These combine wit hydrogen, which has lost sulphate ions to form water. The positive lead ions that are left on the positive plates also attract and combine with sulphate ions from the electrolyte to form lead sulphate on the positive plates. Once lead sulphate collects on both the positive and negative plates and the electrolyte becomes diluted by the water, which has formed in it, the cell is considered discharged. A discharged cell is recharged using a direct current of the correct voltage.

When the positive plates of the cell are connected to the positive of the charging source and the negative plates to the negative of the source, electrons are drawn from the positive plates and forced onto the negative plates. Electrons arriving at the negative plates drive negative sulphate ions out of the lead sulphate back into the electrolyte. The sulphate ions join with hydrogen to form sulphuric acid. When the electrons flow from the positive plates they leave positively charged lead ions. These attract oxygen from the water in the electrolyte to form lead peroxide on the plates. When the cell is fully charged the positive plates again become lead peroxide and the negative plates lead. The electrolyte becomes a high concentration of sulphuric acid. For Training Purposes Only


Page 69


During the charging of the cell hydrogen gas released from the electrolyte and bubbles top the surface. As the cell nears full charge more hydrogen is released and the bubbling increases. A vent is, therefore, incorporated in the cell cap. The voltage of a fully charged cell is approximately 2.2 volts (2 volts nominal) and in the discharged state 1.8 volts.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 38: Lead acid battery construction



Page 70


3.5.5.6 (HYDROMETER)

g n i n

A hydrometer is a glass syringe with a float inside it. The float is a hollow glass tube sealed at both ends and weighted at the bottom end, with a scale calibrated in specific gravity marked on its side. To test an electrolyte, draw it into the hydrometer using the suction bulb. Draw enough

i a r T

electrolytes into the hydrometer to make the float rise. Do not draw in so many electrolytes that the float rises into the suction bulb. The float will rise to a point determined by the specific gravity of the electrolyte. If the electrolyte contains a large amount of active ingredient, its specific


gravity will be relatively high. The float will rise higher than it would if the electrolyte contained only small amount of ingredient.

To read the hydrometer, hold it in a vertical position and read the scale at the point that surface of the electrolyte touches the float. Refer to the manufacturer’s technical manual to determine whether or not the battery’s specific gravity is within specifications.

Specific Gravity Test Procedure:

1. Wear suitable eye protection.

2. Remove vent caps or covers from the battery cells.

3. Squeeze the hydrometer bulb and insert the pickup tube into the cell closest to the battery's positive (+) terminal. 4. Slowly release the bulb to draw in only enough electrolytes to cause the float to rise. Do not remove the tube from the cell. 5. Read the specific gravity indicated on the float. Be sure the float is drifting free, not in contact with the sides of top of the barrel. Bend down to read the hydrometer at eye level. Disregard the slight curvature of liquid on the float. 6. Record your readings and repeat the procedure for the remaining cells. For Training Purposes Only


Page 71


Note: Hydrometer should be flushed with fresh water after each use to prevent inaccurate readings. Storage battery hydrometers must be not used for any other purposes.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 39: Specific gravity test procedure (Hydrometer)



Page 72


3.5.5.7 Lead Acid Battery Inspection and Service

General guide for inspection and service of batteries:

1. Inspect the battery. •

Ensure no crack on supporting structure.


2. Remove battery cover. •

Look for evidence of leakage and corrosion.

i a r T

g n i n

3. Check electrolyte level and add distilled water if required.

4. If the battery is suspected being defective, perform load test or a hydrometer test.

5. Inspect the battery terminal. •

Ensure the terminals are free from corrosion.

6. Inspect the battery cable.

7. Inspect the ventilation system of the Aircraft and battery box. For Training Purposes Only


Page 73


3.5.5.8 Alkaline Battery

The Nickel-Cadmium Cell

i a r T

g n i n

Aircraft engines, particularly turbines, require extremely high current for starting. High rate discharge of lead acid batteries causes their output voltage to fall, due to the increased internal resistance caused by the build-up of sulphate deposits. This drawback led to the development of


the alkaline cell for aircraft used.

The ni-cad battery has a very distinct advantage in that its internal resistance is very low. Its output voltage, therefore remain almost constant until it is nearly totally discharged. The low resistance also allows high charging rates without damage. The ni-cad cell has positive plates made from powdered nickel which is fused, or sintered to a porous nickel mesh. The mesh is then impregnated with nickel hydroxide. The negative plates are of the same construction but are impregnated with cadmium hydroxide.

Separators of nylon and cellophane, in the form of a continuous strip wound between the plates, keeps the plates from touching each other. Cellophane is used because it has low electrical resistivity and also acts a gas barrier preventing oxygen, given off at the positive plates during overcharge, from passing to the negative plates. If the oxygen were allowed to reach the negative plates it would combine with active cadmium, reduce cell voltage and produce heat as a result of chemical reaction. The electrolyte is an alkaline solution of potassium hydroxide and distilled or de-ionized water with a specific gravity of 1.24 to 1.30.The specific gravity of the electrolyte does not change during charge or discharge so it cannot be used to indicate the state of charge. The electrolyte does not play an active part in the chemical reaction and is used only to provide a path of current flow. For Training Purposes Only


Page 74


During charging of the cell an exchange of ions takes place. Oxygen is removed from the negative plates and added to the positive plates, the electrolyte acting as an ionized conductor. The positive plates are, therefore brought to a higher state of oxidation. The electrolyte is forced out to both plates during charging so that the electrolyte level in the cell rises. The electrolyte level is, therefore only checked and any water added

g n i n

when the cell is fully charged. Towards the end of the charging process and during overcharging, gassing occurs as result of electrolysis. This only reduces the water content of the electrolyte.


i a r T

During discharge the chemical reaction is reversed. The positive plates gradually lose oxygen to become less oxidized and the negative plates regain oxygen and change to cadmium hydroxide. The plate absorb electrolyte so that the level in the cell falls but it should always cover the top of the plates.

The discharge and charging cycle of a ni-cad cell produces high temperature which, if not correctly monitored can break down the cellophane gas barrier. This creates a short circuit allowing current flow to increase. More heat is produced, causing further break down. The condition is aggravated by the internal resistance of the cell falling as the temperature rises. These factors all contribute to a process known as “thermal runaway” which ultimately results in the destruction of the cell.



Page 75


f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M FIGURE 41: Alkaline Battery


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 42: Nickel Cadmium Battery


Page 76



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 43: Nickel Cadmium battery connections



Page 77


3.5.5.9 Alkaline Battery Inspection

The schedule servicing usually based on flying hours, annual and periodic inspection. General guideline laid down by the manufacturer must be followed: 1) Inspect the battery case 2) Inspect the vent system for proper airflow


3) Inspect the cells and clean as needed

4) inspect the cell connectors for corrosion, cracks and overheating 5) Inspect the cell caps

6) Check the cell electrolyte for correct level


i a r T

g n i n


Page 78


3.5.5.10 Battery Charging

It should be remembered that adding the active ingredient to the electrolyte of a discharged battery does not recharge the battery. Adding the

g n i n

active ingredient only increases the specific gravity of the electrolyte and does not converts the plates back to active materials, and so does not bring the battery back to a charged condition. A charging current must be passed through the battery to recharge it.

i a r T

Batteries are usually charged in battery shops. Each shop will have specific charging procedures for the types of batteries to be charged.


Two types of charging

1. Constant voltage charging 2. Constant current charging

1. Constant Voltage Charging

The charger supplies a constant voltage to a battery and allow current to charge as the battery become charged. If the battery is nearly discharged it will offer very little opposition to the electron flowing into the battery. As the battery becomes charged, resistance increases thus current will slowly diminishing.

On aircraft, the battery charged with the constant voltage charging. If more than one battery put on charge, the battery must be connected in parallel.



Page 79


2. Constant Current Charging

The charger supplies a consistent current to a battery. The charging equipment monitors current flow and varies the applied voltage in order to

g n i n

charge the battery. When charging more than one battery, batteries are to be connected in series. A constant current charging requires close supervision to avoid over charging.


i a r T


Page 80


3.5.6 Thermocouples

A thermocouple is a sensor for measuring temperature; it consists of two dissimilar metals, joined together at one end.

g n i n

When the junction of the two metals is heated or cooled a voltage is produced that can be correlated back to the temperature. The thermocouple alloys are commonly available as wire.

i a r T

In 1821 a German physicist named See beck discovered the thermoelectric effect. Thermocouples make use of this so-called Peltier-Seebeck


effect. Thermocouples produce an output voltage which depends on the temperature difference between the junctions of two dissimilar metal wires and it measure the temperature difference between two points, not absolute temperature 3.5.6.1 System Operation

Refer to Figure 45

The thermoelectric voltage produced depends on: Material used

Temperature difference between hot and cold junction

Each hot junction is a pair of dissimilar metallic electrical conductors If two dissimilar metals are joined together a contact potential, which is independent of any external electric supply, will appear at the junction. In a thermocouple two dissimilar metals are joined at both ends to form



Page 81


a hot junction and a cold junction. In the simplest arrangement the thermocouple would be connected directly to the meter, the meter terminals being the cold junction in an aircraft, however the hot junction is in the engine and the meter indicator on the flight deck.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 45: Thermocouple



Page 82


If the thermocouple cold junction were to be connected to the meter by copper wires, as shown in figure 45, the potential at the cold junction would be as if point ‘A’ and ‘B’ were joined together (provided that A and B were at the same temperature). This would still allow the meter to read the difference between V1 and V2.

g n i n

If however, the hot and cold junctions were relatively close together, the temperature difference between them would not be so great as if they

i a r T

were apart. The thermocouple EMF would therefore, be reduced and in Figure 45, there would be a problem of fluctuations in the readings.


If the cold junction was in the meter itself there would be a greater temperature difference and hence a greater EMF and also less fluctuations. To achieve this, the connecting leads from the thermocouple to the meter must be of the same materials as the thermocouples or at least have the same thermoelectric characteristic. They are called extension leads if they are of the same material and compensating leads if they are of the same characteristic.

The small EMF generated by the thermocouple is not only dependent upon the temperature but also upon the metals employed.



Page 83



i a r T

g n i n


Page 84


The measuring junction: (often referred to as the "hot" junction) is that which is exposed to measured temperature. The reference junction: Other junction which is kept at a known temperature; this is often referred to as the "cold" junction. The term thermocouple referred to the complete system for producing thermal voltages

Refer to Figure 46


i a r T

g n i n


Page 85



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 46: Thermocouple Principle



Page 86


3.5.6.2 Types of Thermocouple Surface contact Designed to measure temperature of a solid component Used as the temperature-sensing element of air-cooled-engine cylinder-head temperature-indicating systems Immersion type Designed for the measurement of gases, liquid (e.g. oil temperature).


Used as the sensing element of turbine-engine gas temperature-indicating systems. Copper-Constantan (T Curve)

i a r T

g n i n

The Copper-Constantan thermocouple, with a positive copper wire and a negative Constantan wire is recommended for use in mildly oxidizing and reducing atmospheres up to 400ºC. They are suitable for applications where moisture is present. This alloy is recommended for low temperature work since the homogeneity of the component wires can be maintained better than other base metal wires. Therefore, errors due to the non-homogeneity of wires in zones of temperature gradients are greatly reduced. Chromel-Alumel (K Curve)

The Chromel-Alumel thermocouple, with a positive Chromel wire and a negative Alumel wire, is recommended for use in clean oxidizing atmospheres. The operating range for this alloy is 1260ºC for the largest wire sizes. Smaller wires should operate in correspondingly lower temperatures.

Refer to Figure 47



Page 87



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 47: Copper-constantan (T Curve) / Chromel-Alumel (K Curve)



Page 88


3.5.7 Photocells

g n i n

Photovoltaic cell, also known as a solar cell and photocell It is a device that converts a visible light, infrared and ultra violet directly into a voltage. Since the current from a photocell can easily be used to operate switches or relays, it is often used in light-actuated counters,

i a r T

automatic door openers, and intrusion alarms. Photocells in such devices are popularly known as electric eyes.


Photo-emission:

The application of light causes the emission of electron from a prepared surface, the construction of which is shown in Figure 48A. With the positive of a supply connected to the anode of the cell and the negative to the cathode, the current in the circuit will depend upon the amount of light falling on the device: no light, no current; high intensity light, high current.

When the cell is used in an aircraft smoke detector, a projector lamp shines abeam of light past the detector cell. If no light reaches the cell, no current flows in the cell’s external circuit and no warning is given.

When smoke appears in the detection chamber, the projection lamp beam is refracted onto the detector cell by the smoke particles. The cell conducts activating the smoke warning circuit. This shown in Figure 48B



Page 89



i a r T

g n i n


Page 90


Photo-voltaic: The application of lights causes the production of a voltage. It can be used to produce electrical energy for a variety of purposes. If a large number of cells are connected together to form a solar panel the power generated is limited only by number of cells employed.

g n i n

The silicon solar cell consists of a water of silicon which has been doped to make it a semiconductor. A thin layer of boron is then diffused into

i a r T

it. The wafer is reinforced with metal and provided with electrical contacts to enable it to be connected to other cells


Photon light penetrating an atom of the cell forces electrons in the atom into the conduction band. This produces a voltage across the cell which can be used to drive a current around an externally connected circuit.

They are many uses of the solar cell, from the operation of light meters in cameras to powering calculators and satellites in space.



Page 91



i a r T

g n i n


Page 92


Schematic symbol for a photovoltaic cell The device is a flat semiconductor P - N junction. The assembly is made transparent - light can fall directly on the P-type silicon. The metal ribbing, forming the positive electrode, is interconnected by means of tiny wires. The negative electrode is a metal backing, placed in contact with the N-type silicon.

Most solar cells provide about 1 watt and 0.5 Volt.


3.5.7.1 Construction of Photo-cells

i a r T

g n i n

Two semiconductor materials are sandwiched together. Electrical energy is produced when light shines on the cell The power capacity of a photocell is very small. It reacts to light-intensity variations in an extremely short time.

This characteristic makes the photocell very useful in detecting or accurately controlling a great number of operations.

The photoelectric cell, or some form of the photoelectric principle, is used in: television cameras

automatic manufacturing process controls door openers

burglar alarms, and so forth. Refer to Figure 48C



Page 93



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 48: Operation of Photo-Cells



Page 94

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS DIRECT CURRENT (DC) CIRCUITS (DCAM 3.6 L2)

3.6 DIRECT CURRENT (DC) ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS (EASE Ref 3.6) Level 2 3.6.1 Introduction

g n i n

A direct current (DC) electrical circuit consists of a source of DC electricity with a conducting wire going from one of the source terminals to a

i a r T

set of electrical devices and then back to the other terminal, in a complete circuit. A DC circuit is necessary for DC electricity to exist. DC circuits may be in series, parallel or a combination. Understanding DC circuits is important for learning about the more complex AC circuits,


like those used in homes. 3.6.1.1 Simple circuit

If you take a continuous source of DC electricity, such as a battery, and connect conducting wires from the positive and negative poles of the battery to an electrical device such as a light bulb, you have formed an electric circuit (Figure 49).

In other words, the electricity flows in a loop from one end of the battery (or source of electricity) to the other end in a circuit. The concept of electric circuits is the basis for our use of electricity. One nice feature of an electrical circuit is that you can install a switch in the circuit to turn the power on or off when you want.

Note: Although electrons move from a negative (-) area toward the positive (+), the convention was established that electricity is designation as moving from (+) to (-).



Page 95



i a r T

g n i n


Page 96


3.6.1.2 Power source, Voltage, current and resistance

g n i n

A DC circuit requires a source of power. Typically, a battery is used to provide continuous DC electricity. A DC generator is another source of energy. Alternating current (AC) electricity can be modified through a rectifier or adapter to create DC electricity. The common adapter used

i a r T

for some of your small DC-powered devices will transform 11OV AC house current into 12V DC current for your device.

The electricity moving through a wire or other conductor consists of its voltage (V), current (I) and resistance (R). The voltage or potential


energy of a source of electricity is measured in Volts. The current of amount of electrons flowing through the wire is measured in Amperes or Amps. The resistance or electrical friction is measured in Ohms.

3.6.1.3 Conductors

The wire and electrical devices must be able to conduct electricity. Metal such as copper is a good conductor of electricity and has a low resistance. The tungsten filament in a light bulb conducts electricity, but it has high resistance that causes it to heat up and glow.\



Page 97


3.6.1.4 Series DC circuit

g n i n

In an electrical circuit, several electrical devices such as light bulbs can be placed in a line or in series in the circuit between the positive and negative poles of the battery. This is called a series circuit (Figure 50). One problem with such an arrangement is if one light bulb burns out, then it acts like a switch and turns off the whole circuit.


i a r T


Page 98


3.6.1.5 Schematic

g n i n

Every device in a DC circuit, whether a light bulb or electrical motor can be represented by an electrical resistance or resistor. Usually, when drawing a circuit diagram or schematic, you use certain symbols for the battery and resistors. The circuit elements are connected end-to-end

i a r T

(Figure 51). With this configuration, the current through each element is the same, but the voltage drop across each element is different.



Page 99


3.6.1.6 Parallel DC circuit Devices can also be arranged in a parallel configuration, such that if any bulbs go out, the circuit is still intact. Not only is a parallel circuit

g n i n

useful for holiday lighting, the electrical wiring in homes is also in parallel. In this way lights and appliances can be turned on and off at will. Otherwise if you turned one light off or one burned out, all the other lights in the house would go off too (Figure 52&53).

i a r T

If either light bulb would go out, the other would still shine. You could add other bulbs or even appliances such as electric motors in parallel to


this circuit, and they would remain independent of each other. You could also replace a bulb with a series circuit of bulbs or add bulbs or devices in series between parallel items. There are many combinations possible.



Page 100



i a r T

g n i n


Page 101


Quiz to check your understanding

1. Why do they call it a DC circuit?

a) The electricity flows from the source around and back to the source in a circuit b) Because most have a circuit breaker installed


c) To warn people of possible shocks

2. What happens when a light burns out in a series circuit?

i a r T

g n i n

a) The other lights remain lit

b) The voltage increases dramatically

c) The circuit is broken and all lights go out

3. How could you turn off a parallel circuit?

a) You can't turn off a parallel circuit

b) Put a switch before the parallel configuration, like near the battery c) Unscrew one light bulb



Page 102


3.6.2 Ohm’s Law

g n i n

Ohm's law states that, in an electrical circuit, the current passing through a conductor, from one terminal point on the conductor to another terminal point on the conductor, is directly proportional to the potential difference (i.e. voltage drop or voltage) across the two terminal points

i a r T

and inversely proportional to the resistance of the conductor between the two terminal point. For real devices (resistors, in particular), this law is usually valid over a large range of values of current and voltage, but exceeding certain limitations may result in losing simple direct


proportionality (e.g. temperature effects). In mathematical terms, this is written as:

I =

V R

Where I is the current, V is the potential difference, and R is a constant called the resistance. The potential difference is also known as the voltage drop, and is sometimes denoted by E or U instead of V. The SI unit of current is the ampere; that of potential difference is the volt; and that of resistance is the ohm, equal to one volt per ampere.

The law was named after the physicist Georg Ohm, who, in a treatise published in 1827, described measurements of applied voltage, and current passing through, simple electrical circuits containing various lengths of wire, and presented a slightly more complex equation than the above equation to explain his experimental results. The equation above could not exist until the ohm, a unit of resistance, was defined (1861, 1864).



Page 103



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 54: A voltage source, V, drives an electric current, I, through resistor, R, the three quantities obeying Ohm’s law: V = IR



Page 104


3.6.2.1 Using equation The importance of Ohm's Law is that if you know the value to two of the variables in the equation, you can then determine the third. You can

g n i n

measure any of the parameters with a voltmeter. Most voltmeters or multi-meters measure voltage, current and resistance for both AC and DC. Here is an easy way to remember how to solve for any part of the equation. To use this "solving circle," in the Figure 55, cover the letter you don't know. The remaining letters give the equation for determining the unknown quantity.


i a r T

Here are the standard units of measurement for electrical current, voltage, and resistance:



Page 105


Ohm's Law is a very simple and useful tool for analysing electric circuits. It is used so often in the study of electricity and electronics that it needs to be committed to memory by the serious student. For those who are not yet comfortable with algebra, there's a trick to remembering how to solve for anyone quantity, given the other two. First, arrange the letters E, I, and R in a triangle like this:


i a r T

If you know the value E and I, and wish to determine R, just eliminate R from the picture and see what's left:

g n i n

If you know the value E and R, and wish to determine I, eliminate I and see what's left:



Page 106


Lastly, if you know the value I and R, and wish to determine E, eliminate E and see what's left:


Find voltage

i a r T

g n i n

If you know the value of current and resistance, you can find voltage from V = I * R. For example, if the current I = 0.2A and the resistance R = 1000 ohms, then

V = 0.2A * 1000 Ω = 200V

Find current

If you know the value of voltage and resistance, you can use algebra to change the equation to I =V / R to find the current. For example, if V = 110V and R = 22000 ohms, then

1= 110V / 22000 Ω = 0.005A



Page 107


Find resistance

g n i n

If you know the value of voltage and current, you can use algebra to change the equation to R =V / I to find the resistance. If V = 220V and I = 5A, then R = 220V / 5A = 44 Ω


Example 1:

i a r T

An emf source of 6.0V is connected to a purely resistive lamp and a current of 2.0 amperes flows. All the wires are resistance free. What is the resistance of the lamp? (Figure 56)



Page 108


Hints:

1. Where in the circuit does the gain in potential energy occur? 2. Where in the circuit does the loss of potential energy occur? 3. What is Ohm's Law?


Solution:

i a r T

g n i n

The gain of potential energy occurs as a charge passes through the battery, that is, it gains a potential of E=6.0V. No energy is lost to the wires, since they are assumed to be resistance-free. By conservation of energy, the potential that was gained (i.e. E=V=6.0V) must be lost in the resistor.

So, by Ohm's Law:

V=I R

R=V/I = 3.0



Page 109


Example 2:

g n i n

Suppose we have a battery that is 1.5 Volts, and we attach a resistance of 10 Ohms between its terminals (as shown in the figure below). What is the value of the current that will flow through the resistance? (Figure 57)


Solution:

I = E/R

I = 1.5 V /10

i a r T

= 0.15 A

= 150 mA (milliamps

Figure 57: Diagram of the circuit in this problem



Page 110


3.6.2.2 An analogy for Ohm's Law

Ohm's Law also makes intuitive sense if you apply it to the water-and-pipe analogy. If we have a water pump that exerts pressure (voltage) to

g n i n

push water around a "circuit" (current) through a restriction (resistance), we can model how the three variables interrelate. If the resistance to water flow stays the same and the pump pressure increases, the flow rate must also increase.

Pressure

= increase

Voltage

= increase

Flow rate

= increase

Current

= increase

↑

↑

E =I R

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i E =I R n r i p g o n r P SE A M Resistance = same

Resistance = Same

i a r T

If the pressure stays the same and the resistance increases (making it more difficult for the water to flow), then the flow rate must decrease:

Pressure

= same

Voltage

= same

Flow rate

= decrease

Current

=decrease

Resistance = increase


↑

↓

Resistance = increase


Page 111


If the flow rate were to stay the same while the resistance to flow decreased, the required pressure from the pump would necessarily decrease:

Pressure

= decrease

Voltage

= decrease

Flow rate

= same

Current

= same

Resistance = decrease

E =I R ↓

↓

Resistance = decrease


i a r T

g n i n


Page 112


Figure 58 summarizes the relationship between voltage, resistance, and current. This chart can predict the effect of changes in voltage and resistance or it can predict the cause of changes in current. In addition, to showing what happens to current if voltage or resistance changes,

g n i n

the chart also tells you the most likely result if both voltage and resistance change. If the voltage increases (Column 2), the current increases (Column 1) provided the resistance stays the same (Column 3). If the voltage decreases (Column 2), the current decreases (Column 1) provided the resistance stays the same (Column 3).


Example:

i a r T

Solving the three columns mathematically, if 12 volts /4 ohms = 3 amps then increase the voltage to 14 volts/4 ohms = 3.5 amps, an increase in current with the resistance staying at 4 ohms. Decrease the voltage to 10 volts, 10 volts/4 ohms = 2.5 amps or a decrease in current. In both cases, the resistance stays the same.



Page 113



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 58: Relationship between voltage, resistance, and current



Page 114


3.6.3

Kirchhoff's Voltage and Current Law

g n i n

Kirchhoff's voltage and current laws basically state that voltage or current in a circuit must be accounted for - it cannot just 'disappear'. The laws are as follows:

3.6.3.1 Kirchhoff's Current Law


i a r T

Kirchhoff's Current Law, also known as Kirchhoff's Junction Law and Kirchhoff's First Law, defines the way that electrical current is distributed when it crosses through a junction - a point where three or more conductors meet. Specifically, the law states that:

The algebraic sum of current into any junction is zero.

Since current is the flow of electrons through a conductor, it cannot build up at a junction, meaning that current is conserved: what comes in must come out. When performing calculations, current flowing into and out of the junction typically has opposite signs. This allows Kirchhoff's Current Law to be restated as:

The sum of current into a junction equals the sum of current out of the junction.



Page 115


| 3.6.3.2 Kirchhoff's Current Law in action

g n i n

In figure 59, a junction of four conductors (i.e. wires) is shown. The currents i2 and i3 are flowing into the junction, while i1and i4 flow out of it. In other words the sum of all currents entering a junction must equal the sum of those leaving it. In this example, Kirchhoff's Junction Rule yields the following equation: i2 + i3 = i1 + i4 or

-i1 + i2 +i3 – i4 =0


Note: Currents towards point designated as positive, those away from point negative.

i a r T

Figure 59: A diagram of Kirchhoff’s Law



Page 116


3.6.3.3 Kirchhoff's Voltage Law

g n i n

Kirchhoff's Voltage Law describes the distribution of voltage within a loop, or closed conducting path, of an electrical circuit. Specifically, Kirchhoff's Voltage Law states that:

The algebraic sum of the voltage (potential differences) in any loop must equal zero.


i a r T

The voltage differences include those associated with electromagnetic fields (emfs) and resistive elements, such as resistors, power sources (i.e. batteries) or devices (i.e., lamps, televisions, blenders, etc.) plugged into the circuit. Kirchhoff's Voltage Law comes about because the electrostatic field within an electric circuit is a conservative force field. As you go around a loop, when you arrive at the starting point has the same potential as it did when you began, so any increases and decreases along the loop has to be cancelled out for a total change of O. If it didn't, then the potential at the start/end point would have two different values.

Kirchhoff's Voltage Law states that 'in travelling round any closed mesh (section) of a network (circuit), the algebraic sum of the emfs (voltages) acting in the mesh is equal to the algebraic sum of the IR voltage drops for the individual resistance in the mesh.' In other words the sum of all voltage sources must equal the sum of all voltages dropped across resistances in the circuit, or part of circuit as shown in Figure 60:



Page 117



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 60: Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law



Page 118


3.6.3.4 Positive and Negative Signs in Kirchhoff's Voltage Law

g n i n

Using the Voltage Rule requires some sign conventions, which aren't necessarily as clear as those in the Current Rule. You choose a direction (clockwise or counter-clockwise) to go along the loop. When travelling from positive to negative (+ to -) in an emf (power source) the voltage

i a r T

drops, so the value is negative. When going from negative to positive (- to +) the voltage goes up, so the value is positive.


When crossing a resistor, the voltage change is determined by the formula I *R, where I is the value of the current and R is the resistance of the resistor. Crossing in the same direction as the current means the voltage goes down, so its value is negative. When crossing a resistor in the direction opposite the current, the voltage value is positive (the voltage is increasing).

Example 1:

Often, we may only know the value of current flowing through a part of the circuit, and we wish to calculate the voltage drop across that portion of the circuit. Suppose we know that a current of 2 Amperes is flowing through a resistance of 2.5 Ohms, and we would like to determine the voltage across the resistor (Figure 61).



Page 119



Solution:

i a r T

g n i n

Voltage across the resistor =2

A x 2.5 Q = 5 V

In this case, the voltage we are calculating is not at a single point, relative to ground. Rather, the two points in question are either end of the resistor, as shown in the schematic here. Notice that the voltage indicated by the meter is actually 5 volts. This indicates a drop.



Page 120


The current enters the resistor on the left and exits on the right. When the electrons exit the resistor, they have less energy-lower potential. There is always a voltage drop across a resistor. The side of the resistor where the current enters is the positive side (the side with the higher voltage). If we reverse the leads on the meter, we see that the sign of the voltage changes to positive (Figure 62).


i a r T

g n i n

3.6.4 Significance of the internal resistance of a supply

All electrical components have internal resistance. In batteries it is mainly due to the resistance of the electrolyte, in electrical generators it is mainly due to the machine windings, and brushes. The voltage across the open-circuited terminals of a supply is equal to the emf. When the



Page 121


load is connected to the supply, the load currents flow through the internal resistance of the supply and causes an internal resistance volts drop. With the reference to the Figure 63 the on-load terminal voltage V is equal to the emf minus the internal resistance volts drop. So:

V = E - Ir

i a r T

g n i n

This means that a certain amount of the emf at the cell is not available to drive the current round the circuit because it is 'lost' inside the battery. Where:

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M V = Terminal Voltage

I = Current

E = emf

r = Internal Resistance

Figure 63: Internal Resistance



Page 122


If the battery was 1.5V and had an internal resistance of 1Ω and was supplying a lamp which took O.3A then the internal volt drop would be: 0.3 A x 1Ω Ω = 0.3 V So the terminal voltage would be:


1.5V - 0.3V = 1.2V

i a r T

g n i n

When we put a voltmeter across the battery that is what we would measure. We cannot measure the internal volts drop.



Page 123


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 124

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS RESISTANCE /RESISTOR (DCAM 3.7 L1 & 2)

3.7 RESISTANCE AND RESISTOR (EASA Ref: 3.7) Level 1 and 2 3.7.1 Fundamentals

3.7.1.1 (a) Resistance and affecting factors

i a r T

g n i n

The resistor is one of the most diverse and easiest of all the electrical components you will find in your average radio or TV set. This is


because it has been around for many years and plays such a vital role that it will continue to in many new shapes and sizes to come. A resistor is a two-terminal electrical or electronic component that resists an electric current by producing a voltage drop between its terminals in accordance with Ohm's law. The symbol for a resistor is shown in the Figure 64(a) (upper: American symbol, lower: European symbol). As you can see, resistor symbols can be shown either horizontally or vertically (Figure 64(b)).

Figure 64: Resistor symbols



Page 125


The SI unit for measuring resistance is the Ohm (the Greek letterΩ). A component has a resistance of 1 Ω if a voltage of 1 volt across the component results in a current of 1 ampere, or amp, which is equivalent to a flow of one coulomb of electrical charge (approximately 6.241506

g n i n

x 1018 electrons) per second. The multiples kilo ohm (1 kΩ = 1000Ω) and mega ohm (1 MΩ = 106 Ω) are also commonly used. For example, 120 000 Ω is represented as 120k, while 1 200 000 Ω is represented as 1M2. The dot is generally omitted as it can easily be lost in the

i a r T

printing process. In some circuit diagrams, a value such as 8 or 120 represents a resistance in ohms. Another common practice is to use the letter E for resistance. For example, 120E (120R) stands for 120

, 1E2 stands for 1R2 etc.


In an ideal resistor, the resistance remains constant regardless of the applied voltage or current through the device or the rate of change of the current. Whereas real resistors cannot attain this goal, they are designed to present little variation in electrical resistance when subjected to these changes, or to changing temperature and other environmental factors.

A resistor has a maximum working voltage and current above which the resistance may change (drastically, in some cases) or the resistor may be physically damaged (overheat or burn up, for instance). Although some resistors have specified voltage and current ratings, most are rated with a maximum power which is determined by the physical size. Common power ratings for carbon composition and metal-film resistors are 1/8 watt, 1/4 watt, and 1/2 watt. Metal-film and carbon film resistors are more stable than carbon resistors against temperature changes and age. Larger resistors are able to dissipate more heat because of their larger surface area. Wire-wound and resistors embedded in sand (ceramic) are used when a high power rating is required.



Page 126


3.7.1.2 (a)

Variables Effecting Electrical Resistance

g n i n

The flow of charge through wires is often compared to the flow of water through pipes. The resistance to the flow of charge in an electric circuit is analogous to the frictional effects between water and the pipe surfaces as well as the resistance offered by obstacles which are present in

i a r T

its path. It is this resistance which hinders the water flow and reduces both its flow rate and its drift speed. Like the resistance to water flow, the total amount of resistance to charge flow within a wire of an electric circuit is affected by some clearly identifiable variables.


First, the total length of the wires will affect the amount of resistance. The longer the wire, there will be more resistance. There is a direct relationship between the amount of resistance encountered by charge and the length of wire it must traverse. After all, if resistance occurs as the result of collisions between charge carriers and the atoms of the wire, then there is likely to be more collisions in a longer wire. More collisions mean more resistance.

Second, the cross-sectional area of the wires will affect the amount of resistance. Wider wires have a greater cross-sectional area. Water will flow through a wider pipe at a higher rate than it will flow through a narrow pipe; this can be attributed to the lower amount of resistance which is present in the wider pipe. In the same manner, the wider the wire, there will be less resistance to the flow of electric charge. When all other variables are the same, charge will flow at higher rates through wider wires with greater cross-sectional areas than through thinner wires. A third variable which is known to affect the resistance to charge flow is the material that a wire is made of. Not all materials are created equal in terms of their conductive ability. Some materials are better conductors than others and offer less resistance to the flow of charge. Silver is one of the best conductors, but is never used in wires of household circuits due to its cost. Copper and aluminium are among the least expensive materials with suitable conducting ability to permit their use in wires of household circuits. For Training Purposes Only


Page 127


The conducting ability of a material is often indicated by its resistivity. The resistivity of a material is dependent upon the material's electronic structure and its temperature. For most (but not all) materials, resistivity increases with increasing temperature. Figure 65 lists resistivity values for various materials at temperatures of 20 degrees Celsius.


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 65: The resistivity of a material



Page 128


As seen in the Figure 65, there is a broad range of resistivity values for various materials. Those materials with lower resistivities offer less resistance to the flow of charge; they are better conductors. The materials shown in the last five rows of the above table have such high resistivity that they would not even be considered to be conductors.

i a r T

g n i n

The last major factor influencing the resistance of a conductor is temperature. Although some substances, such as carbon, show a decrease in resistance as the ambient (surrounding) temperature increases, most materials used as conductors increase in resistance as temperature


increases. The resistance of a few alloys, such as constantan and manganin, change very little as the temperature changes. The amount of increase in the resistance of a 1-ohm sample of a conductor per degree rise in temperature above 0°C, the assumed standard, is called the temperature coefficient of resistance. The temperature coefficient of resistance must be considered where there is an appreciable change in temperature of a conductor during operation.

3.7.1.3 (b) Positive and negative temperature coefficient conductance

The resistance of pure metals, such as silver, copper, and aluminium, increases as the temperature increases. They are said to have a positive temperature coefficient. The resistance of insulators and semi-conductors and thermistors decreases with an increase in temperature and are to said to have a negative temperature coefficient. However, the resistance of some alloys, such as constantan and manganin, show very little resistance change over their working temperature range.



Page 129


3.7.2 (a) Specific resistance

g n i n

Specific resistance, or resistivity, is the resistance in ohms offered by a unit volume (the circular-mil/foot or the centimetre cube) of a substance to the flow of electric current. Resistivity is the reciprocal of conductivity. A substance that has a high resistivity will have a low

i a r T

conductivity, and vice versa. Thus, the specific resistance of a substance is the resistance of a unit volume of that substance.


The resistance of a conductor of a uniform cross section varies directly as the product of the length and the specific resistance of the conductor, and inversely as the cross-sectional area of the conductor. Therefore, you can calculate the resistance of a conductor if you know the length, cross-sectional area, and specific resistance of the substance. Expressed as an equation, the "R" (resistance in ohms) of a conductor is:

R=ρ

l A

Where:

= (Greek rho) the specific

resistance in ohms circular mil/foot

L = length in feet

A = the cross-sectional area in circular mils.



Page 130


Conductor ampacity rating is a crude assessment of resistance based on the potential for current to create a fire hazard. However, we may come across situations where the voltage drop created by wire resistance in a circuit poses concerns other than fire avoidance. For instance,

g n i n

we may be designing a circuit where voltage across a component is critical, and must not fall below a certain limit. If this is the case, the voltage drops resulting from wire resistance may cause an engineering problem while being well within safe (fire) limits of ampacity.

i a r T

If the load in the Figure 66 will not tolerate less than 220 volts, given a source voltage of 230 volts, then we'd better be sure that the wiring


doesn't drop more than 10 volts along the way. Counting both the supply and return conductors of this circuit, this leaves a maximum tolerable drop of 5 volts along the length of each wire. Using Ohm's Law (R=E/I), we can determine the maximum allowable resistance for each piece of wire.

Figure 66



Page 131


We know that the wire length is 2300 feet for each piece of wire, but how do we determine the amount of resistance for a specific size and length of wire? To do that, we need another formula:

R=ρ

l A


i a r T

g n i n

This formula relates the resistance of a conductor with its specific resistance (the Greek letter "rho" (p), which looks similar to a lower-case letter "p"), its length ("l"), and its cross-sectional area ("A"). Notice that with the length variable on the top of the fraction, the resistance value increases as the length increases (analogy: it is more difficult to force liquid through a long pipe than a short one), and decreases as crosssectional area increases (analogy: liquid flows easier through a fat pipe than through a skinny one).



Page 132


Specific resistance is a constant for the type of conductor material being calculated. The specific resistances of several conductive materials can be found in the Figure 67. We find copper near the bottom of the table, second only to silver in having low specific resistance (good conductivity).


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 67: The specific resistances of several conductive materials



Page 133


Notice that the figures for specific resistance in the above table are given in the very strange unit of "ohms-cmil/ft" (Ω-cmil/ft). This unit indicates what units we are expected to use in the resistance formula (R=pl/A). In this case, these figures for specific resistance are intended to be used when length is measured in feet and cross-sectional area is measured in circular mils.

i a r T

g n i n

The metric unit for specific resistance is the ohm-meter (Ω-m), or ohm-centimetre (Ω-cm), with 1.66243 x 10-9 Ω-meters per Ωcmil/ft

(1.66243 x 10-7 Ω-cm per Ω-cmil/ft). In the Ω-cm column of the table, the figures are actually scaled as µΩ-cm due to their very small


magnitudes. For example, iron is listed as 9.61 µcm, which could be represented as 9.61 x 10-6 Ω-cm. When using the unit of Ω-meter for specific resistance in the R=pl/A formula, the length needs to be in meters and the area in square meters. When using the unit of Ω-centimetre (Ω-cm) in the same formula, the length needs to be in centimetres and the area in square centimetres.

All these units for specific resistance are valid for any material (Ω-cmil/ft, Ω-m, or Ω-cm). One might prefer to use Ω-cmil/ft, however, when dealing with round wire where the cross-sectional area is already known in circular mils. Conversely, when dealing with odd-shaped bus bar or custom bus bar cut out of metal stock, where only the linear dimensions of length, width, and height are known, the specific resistance units of Ω-meter or Ω-cm may be more appropriate.



Page 134


Going back to our example circuit, we were looking for a wire that had 0.2

or less of resistance over a length of 2300 feet. Assuming that

we're going to use copper wire (the most common type of electrical wire manufactured), we can set up our formula as such:


i a r T

g n i n

Algebraically solving for A, we get a value of 116,035 circular mils. Referencing our solid wire size table, we find that "double nought" (2/0) wire with 133,100 cmils is adequate, whereas the next lower size, "single-nought" (1/0), at 105,500 cmils is too small. Bear in mind that our circuit current is a modest 25 amps. According to our ampacity table for copper wire in free air, 14 gauge wires would have sufficed (as far as not starting a fire is concerned). However, from the standpoint of voltage drop, 14 gauge wires would have been very unacceptable.

Let's see what 14 gauge wire would have done to our power circuit's performance. Looking at our wire size table, we find that 14 gauge wires have a cross-sectional area of 4,107 circular mils. If we're still using copper as a wire material, then our specific resistance will still be 10.09 Ω-cmil/ft:



Page 135


Remember that this is 5.651 Ω per 2300 feet of 14-gauge copper wire, and that we have two runs of 2300 feet in the entire circuit, so each wire piece in the circuit has 5.651 Ω of resistance (Figure 68).

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M Figure 68

i a r T

g n i n

Our total circuit wire resistance is two times 5.651, or 11.301Ω. Unfortunately, this is far too much resistance to allow 25 amps of current with a source voltage of 230 volts. Even if our load resistance was 0Ω, our wiring resistance of 11.301 Ω would restrict the circuit current to a mere 20.352 amps! As you can see, a "small" amount of wire resistance can make a big difference in circuit performance, especially in power circuits where the currents are much higher than typically encountered in electronic circuits. Let's do an example resistance problem for a piece of custom-cut bus bar. Suppose we have a piece of solid aluminium bar, 4 centimetres wide by 3 centimetres tall by 125 centimetres long, and we wish to figure the end-to-end resistance along the long dimension (125 cm). First, we would need to determine the crosssectional area of the bar:

Area = Width x Height A = (4 cm) (3 cm) A = 12cm2



Page 136


We also need to know the specific resistance of aluminium, in the unit proper for this application (Ω-cm). From our table of specific resistances, we see that this is 2.65 x 10-6

-cm. Setting up our R=pl/A formula, we have:


i a r T

g n i n

As you can see, the sheer thickness of a bus bar makes for very low resistances compared to that of standard wire sizes, even when using a material with a greater specific resistance. The procedure for determining bus bar resistance is not fundamentally different than for determining round wire resistance. We just need to make sure that cross-sectional area is calculated properly and that all the units correspond to each other as they should.



Page 137


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 138


3.7.3 ( a ) Resistor identification 3.7.3.1 ( a ) Resistor colour code

g n i n

Resistance value is marked on the resistor body. The first three bands provide the value of the resistor in ohms and the fourth band indicates the tolerance. Tolerance values of 5%, 2%, and 1% are most commonly available.


i a r T

Resistors manufactured for military use may also include a fifth band which indicates component failure rate (reliability). Figure 69 shows the colors used to identify resistor values.



Page 139



i a r T

g n i n


Page 140


Marking the resistance with five bands is used for resistors with tolerance of 2%, 1% and other high-accuracy resistors. First three bands determine the first three digits, fourth is the multiplier and fifth represent the tolerance. For SMD (Surface Mounted Device) the available space

g n i n

on the resistor is very small. 5% resistors use a 3 digit code, while 1% resistors use a 4 digit code (Figure 70). For some electrical circuits, the resistor tolerance is not important and it is not specified. In that case, resistors with 5% tolerance can be used. However, devices which

i a r T

require resistors to have a certain amount of accuracy need a specified tolerance. BS 1852 (British Standard 1852) Coding for resistor values



Page 141



Figure 70: (a) Four-band resistor


(b) Five-band resistor

i a r T

(c) Cylindrical SMD resistor

g n i n

(d) Flat SMD resistor


Page 142


The letter R is used for Ohms and K for Kilo ohms M for Mega ohms and placed where the decimal point would go. At the end is a letter that represents tolerance where M=20%, K=10%, J=5%, G=2%, and F=1% D=.5% C=.25% B=.1% (Figure 71).


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 71: BS 1852 (British Standard 1852)



Page 143


3.7.3.2 (a) Wattage ratings

g n i n

If the flow of current through a resistor increases, it heats up, and if the temperature exceeds a certain critical value, it can be damaged. The wattage rating of a resistor is the power it can dissipate over a long period of time. Wattage rating is not identified on small resistors. Figure 72 shows the size and wattage rating.


i a r T

Figure 72: Resistor Dimensions



Page 144


Most commonly used resistors in electronic circuits have a wattage rating of 1/2W or 1/4W. There are smaller resistors (1/8W and 1/16W) and higher (1W, 2W, 5W, etc). In place of a single resistor with specified dissipation, another one with the same resistance and higher rating may

g n i n

be used, but its larger dimensions increase the space taken on a printed circuit board as well as the added cost. Power (in watts) can be calculated according to one of the following formulae:


i a r T

Where V represents resistor voltage in Volts, I is the current flowing through the resistor in Amps and R is the resistance of resistor in Ohms. For example, if the voltage across an 820 Ω resistor is 12V, the wattage dissipated by the resistors is:



Page 145


A 1/4W resistor can be used. In many cases, it is not easy to determine the current or voltage across a resistor. In this case the wattage dissipated by the resistor is determined for the "worst" case. We should assume the highest possible voltage across a resistor, i.e., the full voltage of the power supply (battery, etc). If we mark this voltage as VB, the lowest dissipation is:


For example, if VB=9V, the dissipation of a 220 Ω resistor is:

i a r T

g n i n

A 0.5W or higher wattage resistor should be used.



Page 146


3.7.4 (a )

Resistors in series, parallel and series parallel combination

g n i n

Below are some of the most basic and most abundant resistor patterns you will see in the electronics field. You will see these patterns in many circuits for two main reasons and the first being that it may be difficult and/or expensive to create a resistive level with just one resistor. The

i a r T

other reason being that in many circuits a component such as the variable resistor will be in parallel with a capacitor or an inductor to produce such circuits as bass and tone control for radios. The possibilities are endless and you will see these same circuits many times in the field of


electronics. There are basically three different types of circuits that the resistor can be in:

1. Series

2. Parallel

3. Series parallel combination



Page 147


7.4.1 (a) Resistors in series

g n i n

The current through resistors in series stays the same, but the voltage across each resistor can be different. The sum of the potential differences (voltage) is equal to the total voltage. The basic idea of a "series" connection is that components are connected end-to-end in a line to form a single path for electrons to flow (Figure 73).


i a r T

Figure 73: Resistors in series

In general, the equivalent resistance of resistors connected in series is the sum of their resistances (add up all the resistor values). That is,



Page 148


Example:

g n i n

The current flowing in a circuit containing four resistors connected in series is I = 1.0 A. The potential drops across the first, second and third resistors are, respectively: V1 = 5 V, V2= 8 V and V3 = 7 V. The equivalent resistance of the circuit is R = 30 (Figure 74). Find the total

i a r T

voltage supplied by the battery and also current, voltage drop, and resistance of each resistor in the circuit.


Figure 74: Example Problem: Resistors in series



Page 149


Hints

1. How are resistors related when connected in series? 2. What is true about potential drops of resistors when connected in series? 3. You will need to use Ohm's Law. Solution:


First, let's label the diagram with the information given in the question.

i a r T

g n i n

Because the resistors are connected in series, then the same current flows through each one. Using the Ohm's Law, we can find the resistances of the first, second and third resistors.



Page 150


Now, using the equivalent resistance, we can find the resistance in the fourth resistor. This is a series circuit, so the equivalent resistance is the sum of the individual resistances.


i a r T

g n i n

The current flowing through the fourth resistor is also 1=1.0A. Using Ohm's Law again, we find the voltage across this resistor.

The total voltage supplied by the battery must equal to the total voltage drop across the circuit (this is known as Kirchhoff's Voltage Law). So, we must sum up the voltage drops across the resistors.



Page 151


3.7.4.2 (a) Resistors in parallel

g n i n

Resistors can be connected such that they branch out from a single point (known as a node), and join up again somewhere else in the circuit. This is known as a parallel connection. Each of the three resistors in Figure 75 is another path for current to travel between points A and B.

i a r T

There are many paths for electrons to flow, but only one voltage across all components. Resistors in a parallel configuration each have the same potential difference (voltage). Note that the node does not have to physically be a single point; as long as the current has several


alternate paths to follow, then that part of the circuit is considered to be parallel. Figure 75(a) and 75(b) are identical circuits, but with different appearances.

Figure 75: Resistors in parallel



Page 152


To find their total equivalent resistance (Req):

i a r T

g n i n

The parallel property can be represented in equations by two vertical lines "II" (as in geometry) to simplify equations. For two resistors:


Total parallel resistance is less than anyone of the individual branch resistances because parallel resistors resist less together than they would separately.



Page 153


Example:

In the following schematic diagram (Figure 76), find the total current, I.

Hints


i a r T

g n i n

1. You will need Ohm's Law.

2. How are resistors related when connected in parallel? 3. What is the potential drop across each resistor? 4. How does current behave in parallel branches?



Page 154


Solution: We know the total potential of this circuit, ε =12.0 V

g n i n

So, between points A and B, the potential must drop 12.0V. Also, the potential drop across branches of a circuit is equal. That is,


We can use Ohm's Law to find the current across each resistor.

i a r T

Therefore,



Page 155


Recall that the currents through branches of a parallel circuit add to give the total current. That is, the total current 'splits up' so that part of the total current travels down each branch. Because of conservation of charge, the sum of the currents in each branch must equal the amount going into the branch. (This is Kirchhoff's Current Law.) So, adding up the three currents, we get:


So, the total current is I =12.0A.


i a r T

g n i n


Page 156


3.7.4.3 (a) Resistors in Series Parallel Combinations

A resistor network that is a combination of parallel and series can sometimes be broken up into smaller parts that are either one or the other. For instance,


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 77: Resistors in Series Parallel Combinations



Page 157


Here, we will combine series circuits and parallel circuits. No new equations will be learned here. We can imagine a branch in a parallel circuit, but which contains two resistors in series. Example in Figure 78(a) is between points A and B.

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M 78: Combination Circuit 1

i a r T

g n i n

In this situation, we could calculate the equivalent resistance of branch AS using our rules for series circuits. So,

RAB=R 1 + R 2

Now, we can replace the two resistors with a single, equivalent resistor with no effective change to the circuit. As can be seen in Figure 78(b), the circuit is now a parallel circuit, with resistors RAB and R3 in parallel. This circuit can be solved using the same rules as any other parallel circuit. Another combination circuit can occur with parallel circuits connected in series. Figure 79(a) shows a typical example of two parallel circuits (AB and CD) connected in series with another resistor, R3.



Page 158


Parts (b) and (c), the resistors in the parallel circuit AB and CD can be replaced by an equivalent resistance. Again, we will use the equivalence rule for resistors connected in parallel. This gives:


i a r T

g n i n

So, the equivalent resistance between points A and B is RAB. Similarly, we can replace the parallel circuit containing R4 and R5 (between points C and D) with its equivalent resistance, RCD. Now, you can see that we have simplified Circuit 2 to one which contains resistors connected in series only. That is, this circuit now contains RAB, R3, and RCD in series. The equivalent resistance for this circuit would be found using:

Figure 79: Combination Circuit 2



Page 159


Analysis technique

g n i n

The goal of series-parallel resistor circuit analysis is to be able to determine all voltage drops, currents, and power dissipations in a circuit. The general strategy to accomplish this goal is as follows:

i a r T

• Step 1: Assess which resistors in a circuit are connected together in simple series or simple parallel.


• Step 2: Re-draw the circuit, replacing each of those series or parallel resistor combinations identified in step 1 with a single, equivalent-value resistor. If using a table to manage variables, make a new table column for each resistance equivalent.

• Step 3: Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the entire circuit is reduced to one equivalent resistor.

• Step 4: Calculate total current from total voltage and total resistance (I=E/R).

• Step 5: Taking total voltage and total current values go back to last step in the circuit reduction process and insert those values where applicable.

• Step 6: From known resistances and total voltage / total current values from step 5, use Ohm's Law to calculate unknown values (voltage or current) (E=IR or I=E/R).



Page 160


• Step 7: Repeat steps 5 and 6 until all values for voltage and current are known in the original circuit configuration. Essentially, you will proceed step-by-step from the simplified version of the circuit back into its original, complex form, plugging in values of voltage and current where appropriate until all values of voltage and current are known.

• Step 8: Calculate power dissipations from known voltage, current, and/or resistance values.


Example 1:

Find the total resistance in Figure 80

i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 80: Combination Circuit 3



Page 161


Hints

1. Which resistors are in parallel and which are in series?

g n i n

2. Is this circuit composed of small groups of parallel resistors, all connected in series? Or is it composed of groups of series resistors, connected in parallel?


Solution:

i a r T

This circuit is composed of 3 'elements' connected in series: the group of parallel resistors between A and B, the single resistor R3, and the group of parallel resistors between C and D. First, we will find the equivalent resistance between A and B. Here, we have two resistors, R1 and R2, connected in parallel. Using the formula for resistors connected in parallel we can find the equivalent resistance between points A and B. Let's call this equivalent resistance RAB.



Page 162


Now, we'll find the equivalent resistance between C and D, and will call it RCD. Using the equation from above for resistors connected in parallel,


i a r T

g n i n

Replacing the two parallel sections with their equivalent resistances, and redrawing the circuit, we get the circuit in Figure 81. We see that there are three resistances connected in series: RAB, R3, and RCD.

Figure 81: Combination Circuit 3, Simplified



Page 163


Using the formula for resistors in series, we can find the equivalent resistance of the circuit.

R=RAB + R3 + RCD R=2.857 + 0.889 + 3.0 R=6.7Ω

So the equivalent resistance of this circuit is R =6.7Ω.


i a r T

g n i n


Page 164


Example 2: Figure 82 shows part of a circuit. It consists of resistors combined in both parallel and series configurations. Find the equivalent resistance.

Hints


i a r T

g n i n

1. What is the equivalent resistance for resistors in parallel? in series?

Solution:

In this partial circuit, there are three main branches, branch AB, branch CD, and branch EF. As you can see, branch AB contains two resistors in series, R1 and R2. Branch CD has just one resistor, R3. Finally, there are two resistors in branch EF. Let's look at branch AB first. We will simplify this branch by finding the equivalent resistance between A and B. Note that R1 is connected in series with R2.



Page 165


Using the equation for resistors in series we can find RAB.

g n i n

Now, in branch CD there is only one resistor, so this branch cannot be simplified further. In branch EF, however, there are two resistors,

i a r T

connected in series with one another. Using the equation for resistors in series, we can find the equivalent resistance in branch EF, REF.


We can redraw circuit 4 using RAB , R3, and REF, as seen in Figure 83. This circuit has been simplified to a parallel circuit, with three resistances in parallel.



Page 166


Using the formula for resistors connected in parallel we can find the equivalent resistance of these branches.


3.7.5 (b) Fixed resistors

i a r T

g n i n

In an electrical circuit, some objects may need a lesser amount of current than the input value. In such cases, fixed resistors are used to reduce the flow of current. They are placed in such a way that a higher voltage must first pass through them before it flows further. The value of the resistance is fixed and does not change with change in the applied voltage or current flowing through it. The resistance value is measured in ohms and the value ranges from a few milliohms to about a gigaohm. Resistors are universally used in all electrical circuits of devices like TVs, radios, refrigerators, machines, microelectronic semiconductor devices, regulators, etc.



Page 167


3.7.6 (b) Tolerance and limitations

A fixed resistor has a resisting material in the centre and conducting material at the end. Resistance is proportional to the length of the resistor

g n i n

and to the material's resistivity and inversely proportional to its cross-sectional area. The resistor will be damaged if it is exposed to a voltage greater than its maximum working value. The equation to determine the voltage V through a resistor of resistance R ohms with a current I in amperes is V= IR.


i a r T

When a designer chooses a resistor, certain factors must be taken into account. These are tolerance, power rating, and stability. Due to mass production of resistors their exact value cannot be guaranteed and the tolerance specifies the maximum and minimum value of resistance the resistor will have e.g., 200Ω ± 10%. This will have a resistance value from 180Ω to 220Ω. All resistors have a power rating (in watts) which indicates the maximum power that can be dissipated without the temperature rise being such that damage occurs to the resistor. If the current through the resistor is exceeded the resistor will overheat and burn out. In electronic circuits typical ratings are 1/4W, 1/2W, 1W, and 2W. The greater the physical size, the greater it's rating.

3.7.7 (b) Stability

The stability of a resistor is its ability to maintain its resistance value over a period of time within a working circuit. This can be an important factor in some electronic circuits.



Page 168


3.7.8 (b) Methods of construction of Fixed Resistors 3.7.8.1 (b) Types of fixed resistors: Low power resistors

g n i n

The carbon film resistor is composed of a resistive material like graphite that is then cut into blocks or wrapped, or grafted in a desired way. For example, the length of the resistive material will determine how much resistance will there be while the width of the resistive material will

i a r T

determine what kind of power it can handle, the wider it is the more power it can handle. The different types of carbon film resistors can be seen in Figure 84. There are some three distinct types of carbon film resistors which as follows:


•

The standard film resistor (A) - a circular resistor with two pins extending from opposite sides or the barrel- shaped resistor.

•

The chip resistor (B) - this type of resistor was introduced in the late 80's to accommodate for the ever shrinking computer components where there can be up to 6 layers per circuit board.

•

The network resistor (C) - this type of resistor comes in (SIPP) form and can contain up to 12 resistors in a compact space that cannot compare.

Typical tolerance is ± 5% from a few ohms to 10MΩ. Ratings from 0.125W to 1W with very good stability

Figure 84: Low power resistors



Page 169


3.7.8.2 (b) Types of fixed resistors: High power resistors

The most common wire wound resistor is composed up by a fairly resistive wire wrapped around a ceramic cylinder and typically has a power

g n i n

range from 5 to 50 watts and is most often found in power supplies and amplifiers. It is common to find these components heat up to levels that burns to the touch and is the reason why they are made up of ceramic, a fire resistant material. The schematic symbol is the same as the carbon film resistor so it is also quite easy to remember.


i a r T

Figure 85: High power resistors

The wire wound resistors have low tolerance and high stability, and any resistor over 1W will be of the wire wound type. The wire is in-home, constantan or managing wound on a former and given a protective coating. They have resistance values from 1Ω to 25kΩ and can operate up to 10-20W.



Page 170


3.7.9 (b) Variable resistors

Resistors can also be shown to have varying rather than fixed resistances. This might be for the purpose of describing an actual physical

g n i n

device designed for the purpose of providing an adjustable resistance, or to show some component that just happens to have an unstable resistance. In fact, any time you see a component symbol drawn with a diagonal arrow through it, then that component has a variable rather than a fixed value.


i a r T

The variable resistor is a very important component that is found in many electrical appliances for such things as tone and bass controls as well as volume. This is due to the fact that resistors can be joined together with other components to form filters for a desired levels. They can also be found in computer monitors for color or positioning as well as the dimming switch for your lamps. This is done through digital to analogue and analogue to digital circuits, one great advantage to this is that you are able to turn a knob instead of typing a value in every time you want to change the tint or brightness. The variable resistor is a resistor whose value can be adjusted by turning a shaft or sliding a control.



Page 171


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 172


3.7.9.1 (b)

Variable Resistors - Construction

Variable resistors consist of a resistance track with connections at both ends and a wiper that moves along the track as you turn the spindle

g n i n

(Figure 86). The track may be made from carbon, cermets (ceramic and metal mixture) or a coil of wire (for low resistances). The track is usually rotary but straight track versions, usually called sliders, are also available.

i a r T

Variable resistors may be used as a rheostat with two connections (the wiper and just one end of the track) or as a potentiometer with all three


connections in use. Miniature versions called presets are made for setting up circuits that will not require further adjustment. Variable resistors are often called potentiometers in books and catalogues. Some variable resistor are designed to be mounted directly on the circuit board, but most are for mounting through a hole drilled in the case containing the circuit with stranded wire connecting their terminals to the circuit board. Variable resistors can be inexpensive single-turn types or multi-turn types with a helical element. Some variable resistors can be fitted with a mechanical display to count the turns. Variable resistors can sometimes be unreliable, because the wire or metal can corrode or wear. Some modern variable resistors use plastic materials that do not corrode and have better wear characteristics.



Page 173



i a r T

g n i n


Page 174


Rheostat

This is the simplest way of using a variable resistor. Two terminals are used: one connected to an end of the track, the other to the moveable

g n i n

wiper. Turning the spindle changes the resistance between the two terminals from zero up to the maximum resistance. Rheostats are often used to vary current, for example to control the brightness of a lamp or the rate at which a capacitor charges. If the rheostat is mounted on a

i a r T

printed circuit board you may find that all three terminals are connected. However, one of them will be linked to the wiper terminal. This improves the mechanical strength of the mounting but it serves no function electrically. The term rheostat is usually reserved for higher-


powered devices, above about 1/2 watt.

Potentiometer

Variable resistors used as potentiometers have all three terminals connected. This arrangement is normally used to vary voltage, for example to set the switching point of a circuit with a sensor, or control the volume (loudness) in an amplifier circuit. If the terminals at the ends of the track are connected across the power supply then the wiper terminal will provide a voltage that can be varied from zero up to the maximum of the supply.



Page 175


Presets

These are miniature versions of the standard variable resistor. They are designed to be mounted directly onto the circuit board and adjusted

g n i n

only when the circuit is built. Some example is to set the frequency of an alarm tone or the sensitivity of a light-sensitive circuit. A small screwdriver or similar tool is required to adjust presets. Presets are much cheaper than standard variable resistors so they are sometimes

i a r T

used in projects where a standard variable resistor would normally be used. Multiturn presets are used where very precise adjustments must be made. The screw must be turned many times (10+) to move the slider from one end of the track to the other, giving very fine control.



Page 176


3.7.9.2 (b) Construction of potentiometers

By means of construction, potentiometer can be divided into 2 groups: coated and coiled. With coated potentiometers, (Figure 88), insulator

g n i n

body is coated with a resistive material. There is an elastic, conductive slider moving across the resistive layer, increasing the resistance between slider and one end of pot, while decreasing the resistance between slider and the other end of the pot.

i a r T

Coiled potentiometers are made of conductor wires coiled around the insulator body. There is an elastic, conductive slider moving across the


wire, increasing the resistance between slider and one end of the pot, while decreasing the resistance between slider and the other the end of pot.

Coated pots are much more common variants. With these, resistance can be linear, logarithmic, inverse-logarithmic or other function depending upon the angle or position of the slider. The most common are linear and logarithmic potentiometers, and the most common applications are radio-receivers, audio amplifiers, and similar devices where pots are used for adjusting the volume, tone, balance, etc. Coiled potentiometers are used in devices that require increased accuracy and constancy of attributes. They feature higher dissipation than coated pots, and are therefore a necessity in high current circuits.



Page 177



i a r T

g n i n


Page 178


Potentiometer's resistance commonly of E6 series, most frequently used multipliers including 1, 2.2 and 4.7. Standard tolerance values include 30%, 20%, 10% (and 5% for coiled pots). Potentiometers come in many different shapes and sizes, with wattage ranging from 1/4W (coated pots for volume control in amps, etc) to tens of Watts (for regulating high currents). Several different pots are shown in the Figure 89 along with the symbol of a potentiometer.


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 89: Potentiometers



Page 179


Uppermost models represent the so called stereo potentiometer. These are actually two pots in one casing, with sliders mounted on shared axis, so they move simultaneously. These are used in stereophonic amps for simultaneous regulation of both LF channels, etc. Lower left is the so called ruler potentiometer, with a slider moving across straight line, not in circle as with other pots. Lower right is coiled pot with wattage of 20W, commonly used as rheostat (for regulating current while charging accumulator and similar).

i a r T

g n i n

For circuits that demand very accurate voltage and current value, trimmer potentiometers (or just trimmers) are used. These are small potentiometers with slider that is adjusted via screw (unlike other pots where adjustments are made via push-button mounted upon the axis


which slider is connected to). Trimmer potentiometers also come in many different shapes and sizes, with wattage ranging from 0.1W to 0.5W. Figure 90 shows several different trimmers, along with the symbol for this element.

Figure 90: Trimmer potentiometers



Page 180


Resistance adjustments are made via screw. Exception is the trimmer from the lower right corner, which can be also adjusted via plastic axis. Particularly fine adjusting can be achieved with the trimmer in plastic rectangular casing (lower middle). Its slider is moved via special transmission system, so that several full turns of the wheel are required to move slider from one end to the other.

3.7.10. (a)

Operation and use of potentiometers and rheostats

i a r T

g n i n

Potentiometers (also called pots) are variable resistors which have three terminals, used as voltage regulators in electronic circuits.


Potentiometers are most commonly used in amps, radio and TV receivers, cassette players and similar devices. They are used for adjusting volume, tone, balance, etc. A rheostat is a variable resistor used to vary the amount of current flowing in a circuit.

Potentiometers find their most sophisticated application as voltage dividers, where shaft position determines a specific voltage division ratio. However, there are applications where we don't necessarily need a variable voltage divider, but merely a variable resistor: a two-terminal device. Technically, a variable resistor is known as a rheostat, but potentiometers can be made to function as rheostats quite easily. In its simplest configuration, a potentiometer may be used as a rheostat by simply using the wiper terminal and one of the other terminals, the third terminal left unconnected and unused (Figure 91).



Page 181



i a r T

g n i n


Page 182


Moving the potentiometer control to the direction where the wiper' is closest to the other used terminal results in a lower resistance. The direction of motion required increasing or decreasing in resistance may be changed by using a different set of terminals (Figure 92).


i a r T

g n i n


Page 183


Be careful, though, that you don't use the two outer terminals, as this will result in no change in resistance as the potentiometer shaft is turned. In other words, it will no longer function as a variable resistance (Figure 93).


i a r T

g n i n


Page 184


Build the circuit as shown in the schematic and illustration, using just two terminals on the potentiometer, and see how motor speed may be controlled by adjusting shaft position. Experiment with different terminal connections on the potentiometer, noting the changes in motor speed control. If your potentiometer has a high resistance (as measured between the two outer terminals), the motor might not move at all until the wiper is brought very close to the connected outer terminal.

g n i n

As you can see, motor speed may be made variable using a series-connected rheostat to change total circuit resistance and limit total current.

i a r T

This simple method of motor speed control, however, is inefficient, as it results in substantial amounts of power being dissipated (wasted) by the rheostat. A much more efficient means of motor control relies on fast "pulsing" of power to the motor, using a high-speed switching device


such as a transistor. A similar method of power control is used in household light "dimmer" switches. Unfortunately, these techniques are much too sophisticated to explore at this point in the experiments. When a potentiometer is used as a rheostat, the "unused" terminal is often connected to the wiper terminal (Figure 94).



Page 185


At first, this seems rather pointless, as it has no impact on resistance control. You may verify this fact for yourself by inserting another wire in your circuit and comparing motor behavior before and after the change (Figure 95).

g n i n

If the potentiometer is in good working order, this additional wire makes no difference whatsoever. However, if the wiper ever loses contact with the resistive strip inside the potentiometer, this connection ensures the circuit does not completely open: that there will still be a resistive

i a r T

path for current through the motor. In some applications, this may be an important. Old potentiometers tend to suffer from intermittent losses of contact between the wiper and the resistive strip, and if a circuit cannot tolerate the complete loss of continuity (infinite resistance) created


by this condition, that "extra" wire provides a measure of protection by maintaining circuit continuity.



Page 186


You may simulate such a wiper contact "failure" by disconnecting the potentiometer's middle terminal from the terminal strip, measuring voltage across the motor to ensure there is still power getting to it, however small (Figure 96).

g n i n

It would have been valid to measure circuit current instead of motor voltage to verify a completed circuit, but this is a safer method because it does not involve breaking the circuit to insert an ammeter in series. Whenever an ammeter is used, there is risk of causing a short circuit by

i a r T

connecting it across a substantial voltage source, possibly resulting in instrument damage or personal injury. Voltmeters lack this inherent safety risk, and so whenever a voltage measurement may be made instead of a current measurement to verify the same thing, it is the wiser choice.




Page 187


3.7.11 (b) Thermistors

A thermistor is a temperature-sensing element or 'thermally sensitive resistors' or temperature-dependent resistor composed of sintered

g n i n

semiconductor material that exhibits a large change in resistance proportional to a small change in temperature. There are two kinds, classified according to the sign of their temperature coefficients: •

i a r T

A Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) resistor is a resistor with a positive temperature coefficient. When the temperature raises the


resistance of the PTC increases. PTCs are often found in televisions in series with the demagnetizing coil where they are used to provide a short-duration current burst through the coil when the TV is turned on. One specialized version of a PTC is the polyswitch that acts as a self-repairing fuse. •

A Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC) resistor is also a temperature-dependent resistor, but with a negative temperature coefficient. When the temperature raise the resistance of the NTC drops. NTCs are often used in simple temperature detectors and measuring instruments.

Most thermistors decrease their resistance with an increase in temperature (negative temperature coefficient). They are made in either rod, disc or bead form, and are made of oxides of nickel, manganese, copper, cobalt and other materials. They are used extensively on aircraft as temperature sensors in heating, air conditioning and battery systems. There are some thermistors that have a positive temperature coefficient. The material used for their construction is barium titanate; they may be used in circuits to limit current due to excessive temperature rise.



Page 188


3.7.11.1 Benefits of Using Thermistors

Accuracy

g n i n

Thermistors are one of the most accurate types of temperature sensors. However thermistors are fairly limited in their temperature range, working only over a nominal range of O0C to 1000C.

Stability


Finished thermistors are chemically stable and not significantly affected by aging. 3.7.12 (b) Voltage dependent resistors

i a r T

Sometimes known as varistors, these are devices whose resistance reduces as the applied voltage is increased. They are manufactured from silicon carbide. Applications include transient voltage suppression, voltage stabilization and switch contact protection e.g. it is connected across the component to be protected and draws only a small current at its normal operating voltage. However, should the voltage increase, (i.e. a surge) its resistance reduces, and it absorbs some of the energy in the surge by diverting current through itself.

The most common type of varistor is the Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV). This contains a ceramic mass of zinc oxide grains, in a matrix of other metal oxides (such as small amounts of bismuth, cobalt, manganese) sandwiched between two metal plates (the electrodes).



Page 189


The boundary between each grain and its neighbor forms a diode junction, which allows current to flow in only one direction. A metal oxide varistor (MOV) is a special type of resistor that changes its resistance with rise in voltage: a very high resistance at low voltage (below the trigger voltage) and very low resistance at high voltage (above the trigger voltage). It acts as a" switch. It is usually used for short circuit protection in power strips or lightning bolt "arrestors" on street power poles, or as a "snubber" in inductive circuits.

3.7.13 (b)

Construction of Wheatstone bridge


i a r T

g n i n


Page 190


3.7.13.1 (a) Operation of Wheatstone bridge

The resistive bridge is also known as Wheatstone bridge. A basic Wheatstone bridge circuit contains four resistances (two voltage dividers,

g n i n

both fed by the same input.), a constant voltage input, and a voltage gage, as illustrated in Figure 97. The circuit output is taken from both voltage divider outputs. In its classic form, a galvanometer (a very sensitive dc current meter) is connected between the output terminals, and is used to monitor the current flowing from one voltage divider to the other.

i a r T

Consider the current flow from A to D (you could think of it as fluid flow in a set of pipelines) and assume that all the resistors are the same


value then the same amount of current will flow down arm ABD as in the arm ACD. The voltage at B will be the same as at C (there will be the same volts drop across R1 as R2) and the voltmeter will show zero. In this condition the bridge is said balanced.

A volts drop is sometimes expressed as an IR drop (V = I x R).

As the voltage drop across R3 must equal the voltage drop across R4.

Dividing one equation by the other:

So 'at balance' this ratio of resistance is true and no current flows in either direction through the galvanometer. If one of the resistors changes even a little bit in value, the bridge will become unbalance and current will flow through the galvanometer. Thus, the galvanometer becomes a very sensitive indicator of the balance condition.



Page 191


Using the Wheatstone bridge

In its basic application a dc voltage (E or V) is applied to the Wheatstone bridge and a galvanometer (G) is used to monitor the balance

g n i n

condition. The values of R1 and R3 are precisely known, but do not have to be identical. R2 is a calibrated variable resistance, whose current value may be read from a dial or scale. An unknown resistor, Rx, is connected as the fourth side of the circuit, and power is applied. R2 is adjusted until the galvanometer (G) reads zero current.


i a r T

This circuit is most sensitive when all four resistors have similar resistance values. However, the circuit works quite well in any event. If R2 can be varied over a 10:1 resistance range and R1 is of a similar value, we can switch decade values of R3 into and out of the circuit according to the range of value we expect from Rx. Using this method, we can accurately measure any value of Rx by moving one multiple-position switch and adjusting one precision potentiometer. If the bridge is used for temperature control systems e.g. windscreen heating then one of the resistors is placed inside the screen next to the heater.

3.7.13.2 (b) Applications of the Wheatstone bridge

Bridge circuits are widely used for the measurement of resistance, capacitance, and inductance. Sir Charles Wheatstone invented many uses himself, and others have been developed, along with many variations, since that time. One very common application in industry today is to monitor sensor devices such as strain gauges. Such devices change their internal resistance according to the specific level of strain (or pressure, temperature, etc.), and serve as the unknown resistor Rx. However, instead of trying to constantly adjust R2 to balance the circuit,



Page 192


the galvanometer is replaced by a circuit that can be calibrated to record the degree of imbalance in the bridge as the value of strain or other condition being applied to the sensor.

g n i n

A second application is used by electrical power distributors to accurately locate breaks in a power line. The method is fast and accurate, and does not require a large number of field technicians. Other applications abound in electronic circuits. It also can be used as:

i a r T

•

Temperature measurement - acting as temperature control device for heated windscreen for example.

•

Measuring strain - fitted to landing gear for the accurate measurement of aircraft weight and C of G position for example.

•

Measuring electrical values - use in measuring instruments.




Page 193


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 194

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS POWER (DCAM 3.8 L2)

3.8 POWER (EASA 3.8) Level 2 3.8.1 Power and Energy

An important part in the study of electricity is the proper use of the correct terminology.

i a r T

g n i n

The statement 'the voltage through a circuit is so many volts' is not correct. Voltage does not pass through a circuit. Voltage or PD exists between two points and therefore the correct statement is 'the voltage across a circuit' or 'the voltage between two points in a circuit'.


Likewise, the statement 'the current across a circuit is so many amperes' is not correct. Current does not exist across two points; it flows through the wires and through the circuit. It should be said 'the current through the circuit' or 'the current through the resistor'.

Just as it is important to use the terms 'voltage' and 'current' correctly, it is also important to use the terms 'energy' and 'power' according to their technical meaning. 3.8.2 Energy

Energy is defined as the capability to do work. Energy has different forms. 'Electrical energy' is one form, because electricity is capable of performing work. But it is necessary to use some kind of electrical components to convert electrical energy into some other forms of energy to accomplish work.



Page 195


For example, an electric motor is used to exert a vertical force on an elevator through a distance. Other examples of energy are heat and light. One of the first types of energy was mechanical energy. Mechanical energy exists in two forms: •

potential energy and

•

Kinetic energy.

Refer to Figure 98


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 98: Potential Energy



Page 196


Potential energy is the energy that a body has by virtue of its position. It took a certain amount of work to get the box on the table. A vertical force had to be exerted through a distance to accomplish this.

g n i n

Once the box is resting in the table, it is capable of doing work simply because of its position. In other words, it has potential energy. Refer to Figure 99. If the box is knocked off the table, it will fall and strike the ground with an impact. It is supposed there is a nail resting under the box

i a r T

where it strikes. If the box is heavy enough, it can actually push the nail into a wooden floor. Since this requires a force through a distance, the box is capable of doing work.


Although the box resting on the table has potential energy, it will do no work until this potential energy is converted into some other forms.

Figure 99: Kinetic Energy



Page 197


As the box is moving through space it has energy by virtue of its motion. This is called kinetic energy. Both kinetic and potential energy are forms of energy which represents the capability to do work.

g n i n

When energy is converted into work, some of it may be lost in the form of heat. The energy and the amount of work done are equivalent; the heat losses are neglected.

i a r T

Electrical energy expressed in watt-seconds (Ws) or watt-hours (Wh) is found by multiplying the voltage times the current times the time.


Electrical energy = Volts · Ampere · time

W = U ·I· t



Page 198


3.8.3 Power Formula

Power is the rate at which work is done or the rate at which energy is being used. Whenever the term power is used it should be noticed that there is a certain amount of time involved.

i a r T

g n i n

The amount of energy in an electric circuit is obtained by multiplying the voltage times the current times the time. The amount of electric power is equal to the amount of energy, per unit of time. The word 'per' means to divide.


The two t's cancel and the equation for power becomes:



Page 199


Now three formulas are available to calculate power:

P = U.I P =I2R P = U2

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M R


i a r T

g n i n


Page 200


3.8.4 Maximum Power Transfer

Maximum power is transferred from the source of electric power to the load when the internal resistance of the source has the same resistance as the load. i.e. when: Ri = RLoad

i a r T

g n i n

This is known as resistance matching and is of importance in radio and electronic circuits, where a high internal resistance power source


exists. Resistance matching is not considered when loads to the mains or secondary batteries are connected because the internal resistance is so low that the battery or mains would be overloaded. This is the basic equiation for electric power, when the voltage is in volts and the current is in amperes, the power is given in watts.

From Ohm's Law it is known that:

If these equations are used in conjunction with the power equation, two furthermore definitions for power are obtained:



Page 201



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 100: Maximum Power Transfer



Page 202

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS CAPACITANCE / CAPACITOR (DCAM 3.9 L2)

3.9 CAPACITANCE AND CAPACITOR (EASA Ref. 3.9) Level 2 3.9.1 Operation and Function of a capacitor

g n i n

Capacitance is the property of an electric conductor that characterizes its ability to store an electric charge. An electronic device called a capacitor is designed to provide capacitance in an electric circuit by providing a means for storing energy in an electric field between two

i a r T

conducting bodies. Capacitors are used in many ways in electronic circuit such as barriers to direct currents, storing memory in a computer chip, storing a charge for an electronic flash camera, or adjusting a tuned circuit such as in a radio.


Description of a Capacitor

Capacitors are short term charge-stores. A capacitor in its simplest form consists of two conducting plates separated by an insulating layer called a dielectric (Figure 101). When a capacitor is connected in a circuit across a voltage source, the voltage forces electron onto the surface of one plate and pulls electrons off the surface of the other plate resulting in a potential difference between the plates. Capacitors are charged and discharged as needed by its application. Capacitors differ in size and arrangements of plates and the type of dielectric materials used. Paper, ceramic, air, mica, and electrolytic materials can be used, depending on the type of dielectric needed. The capacitance of a capacitor may be fixed or adjustable (as in a radio tuner).

The purpose of capacitor is to store electrical energy by electrostatic stress in the dielectric.



Page 203


It is experimentally found that in the presence of an earthed plate B, plate A is capable of withholding more charge than when B is not there. When such a capacitor is connected to a battery, then there is a momentary flow of electrons from A to B. As negatively charged electrons are withdrawn from A, it becomes positive and as these electron collect on B, it becomes negative. Hence, a potential difference is established between plates A and B.


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 101: A capacitor essentially consists of two conducting surfaces separated by a layer of an insulating medium called dielectric



Page 204


When electric charge accumulates on the plates, an electric field is created in the region between the plates that is proportional to the amount of accumulated charge. This electric field creates a potential difference, V = E·d between the plates of this simple parallel-plate capacitor (Figure 102). Capacitors also allow AC current to flow and blocks DC current.


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 103: Capacitor Symbols

The symbol for a capacitor is shown in Figure 103. For Training Purposes Only


Page 205



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 104: Air Tank Analogy for a Capacitor



Page 206


Dielectric Materials

The dielectric material in a capacitor prevents the flow of current between its plates. It also serves as a medium to support the electrostatic force of a charged capacitor. A variety of materials are used for dielectrics as shown in the Figure 105.

i a r T

g n i n

Dielectric materials are rated based upon their ability to support electrostatic forces in terms of a number called a dielectric constant. The ability of the dielectric to support electrostatic forces is directly proportional to the dielectric constant. A vacuum is the standard by which other


dielectrics are rated. The dielectric constant of a vacuum is 1. You can see from the chart that there is very little difference in the dielectric constant of a vacuum and air. Therefore, air is often referred to as having a dielectric constant of 1.

Figure 105: Dielectric Materials



Page 207


Capacitance

If we pump electrons onto the negative plate, electrons are repelled from the negative plate. Since positives do not move, a positive charge is

g n i n

induced. The higher the potential difference, the more charge is crowded onto the negative plate and the more electrons repelled from the positive plate. Therefore charge is stored. The plates have a certain capacitance. Capacitance is defined as:

The charge required to cause unit potential difference in a conductor.


i a r T

Capacitance is measured in units called farads (F), which is named after Michael Faraday (1791-1867). The definition is:

1 Farad is the capacitance of a conductor, which has potential difference of 1 volt when it carries a charge of 1 coulomb. A one farad capacitor stores one coulomb (a unit of charge (Q) equal to 6.28 X1 018 electrons) of charge when a potential of 1 volt is applied across the terminals of the capacitor.

The capacitance of a capacitor is proportional to the quantity of charge that can be stored in it for each volt difference in potential between its plates. Mathematically this relationship is written as:

[Q - Quantity of stored electrical charge in coulombs (C); C - capacitance in farads (F); V - potential difference in volts (V)]



Page 208


Therefore, stored electric charge can be calculated using the formula:

Charge (Q) = Capacitance (C) x Voltage (V)

The difference in potential or voltage of the capacitor can be calculated using the formula:


i a r T

g n i n

A large capacitance means that more charge can be stored. Capacitance is measured in farads symbol F. However 1F is very large, so prefixes (multipliers) are used to show the smaller values:



Page 209


Question:

Define the term "farad." What is the mathematical relationship between a farad, a microfarad, and a Pico farad?


i a r T

g n i n


Page 210


Parallel Plate Capacitor

The capacitance of flat, parallel metallic plates of area A and separation d is given by the expression where:


i a r T

g n i n

k = relative permittivity of the dielectric material between the plates. k=1 for free space, k>1 for all media, approximately =1 for air.



Page 211


Capacitance of Parallel Plates

The electric field between two large parallel plates is given by:


i a r T

g n i n

The voltage difference between the two plates can be expressed in terms of the work done on a positive test charge q when it moves from the positive to the negative plate.

It then follows from the definition of capacitance that:



Page 212


Stored energy

As opposite charges accumulate on the plates of a capacitor due to the separation of charge, a voltage develops across the capacitor owing

g n i n

to the electric field of these charges. Ever-increasing work must be done against this ever-increasing electric field as more charge is separated. The energy (measured in joules, in SI) stored in a capacitor is equal to the amount of work required to establish the voltage across the capacitor, and therefore the electric field. The energy stored is given by:


i a r T

Where V is the voltage across the capacitor.

The maximum energy that can be (safely) stored in a particular capacitor is limited by the maximum electric field that the dielectric can withstand before it breaks down. Therefore, all capacitors made with the same dielectric have about the same maximum energy density (joules of energy per cubic meter).



Page 213


Example:

1. What is the energy held by a 50 000 µ F capacitor charged to 12.0 V? E = ½ CV2 E = ½ X 50 000 x 10-6 F x (12.0 V)2 =3.6 J


i a r T

g n i n


Page 214


3.9.2

Factors affecting capacitance

The value of capacitance of a capacitor depends on three factors:

• The area of the plates. • The distance between the plates. • The dielectric constant of the material between the plates.


i a r T

g n i n

Plate area affects the value of capacitance in the same manner that the size of a container affects the amount of water that can be held by the container. A capacitor with the large plate area can store more charges than a capacitor with a small plate area. Simply stated, "the larger the plate area, the larger the capacitance". The second factor affecting capacitance is the distance between the plates. Electrostatic lines of force are strongest when the charged particles that create them are close together. When the charged particles are moved further apart, the lines of force weaken, and the ability to store a charge decreases.

The third factor affecting capacitance is the dielectric constant of the insulating material between the plates of a capacitor. The various insulating materials used as the dielectric in a capacitor differ in their ability to respond to (pass) electrostatic lines of force. A dielectric material, or insulator, is rated as to its ability to respond to electrostatic lines of force in terms of a figure called the dielectric constant. A dielectric material with a high dielectric constant is a better insulator than a dielectric material with a low dielectric constant. Dielectric constants for some common materials are given in the Figure 106



Page 215



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 106: Dielectric constants for some common materials



Page 216


Notice the dielectric constant for a vacuum. Since a vacuum is the standard of reference, it is assigned a constant of one. The dielectric constants of all materials are compared to that of a vacuum. Since the dielectric constant of air has been determined to be approximately the same as that of a vacuum, the dielectric constant of air is also considered to be equal to one. The formula used to compute the value of capacitance is

C = 0.2249 (KA) d

Where, C = capacitance in picofarads A = area of one plate in sq inches

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M d = distance between the plates in inches

i a r T

K = dielectric constant of the insulating material

g n i n

0.2249 = a constant resulting from conversion from Metric to English units



Page 217



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 107: Factors Affecting Capacitance



Page 218


Example:

Find the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with paraffin paper as the dielectric.


i a r T

g n i n

By examining the above formula you can see that capacitance varies directly as the dielectric constant and the area of the capacitor plates, and inversely as the distance between the plates.



Page 219


Question:

1. State three factors that affect the capacitance of a capacitor.

g n i n

2. A parallel plate capacitor has the following values: K = 81, d = .025 inches, A = 6 square inches. What is the capacitance of the capacitor? (4372 pF)


i a r T


Page 220


Voltage Rating of Capacitors

In selecting or substituting a capacitor for use, consideration must be given to:

1. the value of capacitance desired 2. the amount of voltage to be applied across the capacitor


i a r T

g n i n

If the voltage applied across the capacitor is too great, the dielectric will break down and arcing will occur between the capacitor plates. When this happens the capacitor becomes a short circuit and the flow of direct current through it can cause damage to other electronic parts. Each capacitor has a voltage rating (a working voltage) that should not be exceeded.

The working voltage of the capacitor is the maximum voltage that can be steadily applied without danger of breaking down the dielectric. The working voltage depends on the type of material used as the dielectric and on the thickness of the dialectic. (A high-voltage capacitor that has a thick dielectric must have a relatively large plate area in order to have the same capacitance as a similar low-voltage capacitor having a thin dielectric.) The working voltage also depends on the applied frequency because the losses, and the resultant heating effect, increase as the frequency increases.

A capacitor with a voltage rating of 500 volts dc cannot be safely subjected to an alternating voltage or a pulsating direct voltage having an effective value of 500 volts. Since an alternating voltage of 500 volts (rms) has a peak value of 707 volts, a capacitor to which it is applied should have a working voltage of at least 750 volts. In practice, a capacitor should be selected so that its working voltage is at least 50 percent greater than the highest effective voltage to be applied to it. For Training Purposes Only


Page 221


Capacitor Losses

Power loss in a capacitor may be attributed to dielectric hysteresis and dielectric leakage. Dielectric hysteresis may be defined as an effect in

g n i n

a dielectric material similar to the hysteresis found in a magnetic material. It is the result of changes in orientation of electron orbits in the dielectric because of the rapid reversals of the polarity of the line voltage. The amount of power loss due to dielectric hysteresis depends upon the type of dielectric used. A vacuum dielectric has the smallest power loss.


i a r T

Dielectric leakage occurs in a capacitor as the result of leakage current through the dielectric. Normally it is assumed that the dielectric will effectively prevent the flow of current through the capacitor. Although the resistance of the dielectric is extremely high, a minute amount of current does flow. Ordinarily this current is so small that for all practical purposes it is ignored. However, if the leakage through the dielectric is abnormally high, there will be a rapid loss of charge and an overheating of the capacitor.

The power loss of a capacitor is determined by loss in the dielectric. If the loss is negligible and the capacitor returns the total charge to the circuit, it is considered to be a perfect capacitor with a power loss of zero.



Page 222


Question:

1. Name two types of power losses associated with a capacitor.

g n i n

2. Define the term "working voltage" of a capacitor. What should be the working voltage of a capacitor in a circuit that is operating at 600 volts?


i a r T


Page 223


3.9.3 Capacitor types, Construction, and Function

There are many types of capacitor but they can be split into two groups, polarized (electrolytic) and unpolarised (non electrolytic). Each group has its own circuit symbol. We won't worry at the moment what these terms mean, other than to say:

• Electrolytic capacitors hold much more charge;


i a r T

• Electrolytic capacitors have to be connected with the correct polarity otherwise they can explode.


g n i n


Page 224


3.9.3.1 Polarized capacitors (large values, 1pF +)

1. Electrolytic capacitors

g n i n

Electrolytic capacitors are polarized components, meaning that they have positive and negative connector. They must be connected the

i a r T

correct way round, at least one of their leads will be marked + or -. Positive connector has to be connected to the node with a high voltage than the node for connecting the negative connector. If done otherwise, electrolytic capacitor could be permanently damaged due to


electrolysis and eventually destroyed. Explosion may also occur if capacitor is connected to voltage that exceeds its working voltage. Working voltage is printed on capacitor body. They are not damaged by heat when soldering.

Electrolytic capacitors represent the special type of capacitors with fixed capacity value. Thanks to the special construction, they can have exceptionally high capacity, ranging from one to several thousand µF. They are most frequently used in transformers for leveling the voltage, in various filters, etc. There are two designs of electrolytic capacitors; axial where the leads are attached to each end (220µF in picture) and radial where both leads are at the same end (10µF in picture). Radial capacitors tend to be a little smaller and they stand upright on the circuit board (Figure 108).

It is easy to find the value of electrolytic capacitors because they are clearly printed with their capacitance and voltage rating. The voltage rating can be quite low (6V for example) and it should always be checked when selecting an electrolytic capacitor. It the project parts list does not specify a voltage; choose a capacitor with a rating which is greater than the project's power supply voltage. 25V is a sensible minimum for most battery circuits.



Page 225



i a r T

g n i n


Page 226


2. Tantalum Bead Capacitors

Tantalum capacitors represent a special type of electrolytic capacitors. Tantalum bead capacitors are polarized and have low voltage ratings

g n i n

like electrolytic capacitors. They are expensive but very small, so they are used where a large capacitance is needed in a small size. Modern tantalum bead capacitors are printed with their capacitance, voltage and polarity in full. However older ones use a color-code system which

i a r T

has two stripes (for the two digits) and a spot of color for the number of zeros to give the value in µF.


The standard color code is used, but for the spot, grey is used to mean x 0.01 and white means x 0.1 so that values of less than 10µF can be shown. A third color stripe near the leads shows the voltage (yellow 6.3V, black 10V, green 16V, blue 20V, grey 25V, white 30V, pink 35V). The positive (+) lead is to the right when the spot is facing you: 'when the spot is in sight, the positive is to the right'.



Page 227


3.9.3.2 Unpolarised capacitors (small values, up to 1pF)

Small value capacitors are unpolarised and may be connected either way round. They are not damaged by heat when soldering, except for

g n i n

one unusual type (polystyrene). They have high voltage ratings of at least 50V, usually 250V or so. It can be difficult to find the values of these small capacitors because there are many types of them and several different labeling systems. Many small value capacitors have their value

i a r T

printed but without a multiplier, so you need to use experience to work out what the multiplier should be.


For example 0.1 means 0.1µF = 100nF. Sometimes the multiplier is used in place of the decimal point. For example: 4n7 means 4.7nF.

Figure 110: Examples of Unpolarised capacitors and Circuit Symbol



Page 228


1. Polystyrene Capacitors

This type is rarely used now. Their value (in pF) is normally printed without units. Polystyrene capacitors can be damaged by heat when

g n i n

soldering (it melts the polystyrene) so you should use a heat sink (such as a crocodile clip). Clip the heat sink to the lead between the capacitor and the joint.

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M Figure 111: Polystyrene Capacitors


i a r T


Page 229


Real capacitor values (the E3 and E6 series)

You may have noticed that capacitors are not available with every possible value, for example 22µF and 47µF are readily available, but 25µF

g n i n

and 50µF are not. Imagine that you decided to make capacitors every 1OµF giving 10, 20, 30, 40, and 50 and so on. That seems fine, but what happens when you reach 1000? It would be pointless to make 1000, 1010, 1020, and 1030 and so on because for these values 10 is a

i a r T

very small difference, too small to be noticeable in most circuits and capacitors cannot be made with that accuracy. To produce a sensible range of capacitor values you need to increase the size of the 'step' as the value increases. The standard capacitor values are based on this


idea and they form a series that follows the same pattern for every multiple of ten.

The E3 series (3 values for each multiple of ten): 10, 22, 47, then it continues 100, 220, 470, 1000, 2200,4700,10000 etc.

"Notice how the step size increases as the value increases (values roughly double each time)."

The E6 series (6 values for each multiple of ten): 10,15,22,33,47, 68,etc then it continues 100,150,220,330,470,680,1000 etc.

Notice how this is the E3 series with an extra value in the gaps. The E3 series is the one most frequently used for capacitors because many types cannot be made with very accurate values.



Page 230


Mica Capacitor

Plates are formed by depositing a silver film on mica or using interleaved sheets of metal foil (aluminium). Stability is high but tolerance is low (± 1%). Working voltage is high and leakage current is low. Values range from 0.01µF to 10,000 pF.


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 112: Mica Capacitor

Ceramic Capacitor

These come in many forms e.g. disc, rod or plate, shaped with the ceramic as the dielectric. Small capacitance types range from 1pF to 1µF, with a high working voltage (up to a few thousand volts). Other types may use a ceramic compound (barium titanate), which has a very high dielectric constant so gives a very high capacitance for a small physical size. Stability and tolerance are poor.



Page 231


Variable capacitors

There are two major types of capacitors: fixed and variable. The fixed capacitor has a specific value of capacitance. A variable capacitor

g n i n

allows for a range of capacitance. Variable capacitors are designed so that capacitance can be changed through a mechanical means such as adjusting a screw or turning a shaft.

i a r T

Variable capacitors are mostly used in radio tuning circuits and they are sometimes called 'tuning capacitors'. They have very small


capacitance values, typically between 100pF and 500pF (100pF = 0.0001µF). Variable capacitors are manufactured in various shapes and sizes, but common feature for all of them is a set of immobile, interconnected aluminium plates called stator, and another set of plates, connected to a common axis, called rotor.

In axis rotating, rotor plates get in between stator plates, thus increasing capacity of the device. Naturally, these capacitors are constructed in such a way that rotor and stator plates are placed consecutively. Insulator (dielectric) between the plates is a thin layers of air, hence the name variable capacitor with air dielectric. When setting these capacitors, special attention should be paid not to band metal plates, in order to prevent short-circuiting of rotor and stator and ruining the capacitor (Figure 113(a) upper).

These are actually two capacitors with air dielectric whose rotors share the common axis, so that axis rotation changes the capacities of both capacitors. These two-fold capacitors are used in radio receivers: larger one is used in the input circuit, and the smaller one in the local oscillator. The photo shows symbol for such capacitors. Contour line points to the fact that the rotors are mechanically and electrically interconnected. If one part of variable capacitor should be connected to the mass, which is often the case, then it is rotor(s).



Page 232


Figure 113(a) below shows a typical variable capacitor. It has two sets of plates. One set is called the rotor and the other the stator. The rotor is usually connected to a knob outside the capacitor. The two sets of plates are close together but not touching. Air is the dielectric in a variable capacitor. As the knob is turned, the sets of plates become more or less meshed, increasing or decreasing the distance between the

g n i n

plates. As the plates become more meshed, capacitance increases. As the plates become less meshed, capacitance decreases.

i a r T

Beside the capacitors with air dielectric, there are also variable capacitors with solid insulator. With these, thin insulator foil occupies the space between stator and rotor, while capacitor itself is contained in a plastic casing. These capacitors are much more resistant to mechanical


damage and quakes, which makes them very convenient for portable electronic devices. One such one-fold capacitor is shown on the Figure 113(b). Many variable capacitors have very short spindles which are not suitable for the standard knobs used for variable resistors and rotary switches. It would be wise to check that a suitable knob is available before ordering a variable capacitor.

Variable capacitors are not readily available in amateur conditions, but can be obtained from worn out radio receivers, for example (these capacitors are usually Japanese in origin). One such capacitor, used in portable radio receivers with AM area only, is shown on the Figure 113(c). The' plastic casing contains four capacitors, two variacs and two trimmers, connected according to the scheme from the upper left corner. Connecting the pins according to the lower scheme gets us a one fold variable capacitor with capacity ranging from 12pF to 218pF.



Page 233



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 113: Variable Capacitors



Page 234


Preset or Trimmer Capacitors

Variable capacitors are not normally used in timing circuits because their capacitance is too small to be practical and the range of values

g n i n

available is very limited. Instead timing circuits use a fixed capacitor and a variable resistor if it is necessary to vary the time period.

i a r T

The most common devices containing variable capacitors are the radio receivers, where these are used for frequency tuning. Semi-variable or trimmer capacitors are miniature variable capacitors, with capacity ranging from several pF to several tens of pFs. These are used for fine-


tuning in the radio receivers, radio transmitters, oscillators, etc. They are designed to be mounted directly onto the circuit board and adjusted only when the circuit is built. A small screwdriver or similar tool is required to adjust trimmers. The process of adjusting them requires patience because the presence of your hand and the tool will slightly change the capacitance of the circuit in the region of the trimmer.

Trimmer capacitors are only available with very small capacitances, normally less than 100pF. It is impossible to reduce their capacitance to zero, so they are usually specified by their minimum and maximum values, for example 2-10pF. Three trimmers, along with their symbol, are shown on the Figure 114.



Page 235



i a r T

FIGURE 114: Trimmer Capacitors and Circuit Symbol


g n i n


Page 236


3.9.4 Capacitor Color Coding

Marking the block-capacitors

g n i n

Commonly, capacitors are marked by a number representing the capacity value printed on the capacitor. Beside this value, number

i a r T

representing the maximal capacitor working voltage is mandatory, and sometimes tolerance, temperature coefficient and some other values are printed too. If, for example, capacitor mark in the scheme reads 5nF/40V, it means that capacitor with 5nF capacity value is used and that


its maximal working voltage is 40V. Any other 5nF capacitor with higher maximal working voltage can be used instead, but they are as a rule larger and more expensive.

Sometimes, especially with capacitors of low capacity values, capacity may be represented with colors, similar to four-ring system used for resistors (Figure 115(a)). The first two colors (A and B) represent the first two digits, third color (C) is the multiplier, fourth color (D) is the tolerance, and the fifth color (E) is the working voltage. The color codes currently in use are the Joint Army-Navy (JAN) code and the Radio Manufacturers' Association (RMA) code.

With disk-ceramic capacitors (Figure 115(b)) and tubular capacitors (Figure 115(c) working voltage is not specified, because these are used in circuits with low or no DC voltage. If tubular capacitor does have five color rings on it, then the first color represents the temperature coefficient, while the other four specify its capacity value in the previously described way.



Page 237



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 115: Marking the Capacity Using Colours



Page 238


Example: Figure 116

Ignore the 4th band (tolerance) and 5th band (voltage rating).

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M (a)

(b)

i a r T

g n i n

Figure: 116

(a) Brown, black, orange means 1OOOOpF = 1OnF = 0.01µF.

(b) Note that there are no gaps between the colors bands, so 2 identical bands actually appear as a wide band.

Wide red, yellow means 220nF = 0.22µF.



Page 239


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 240


A mica capacitor, it should be noted, may be marked with either three dots or six dots. Both the three-dot and the six-dot codes are similar, but the six-dot code contains more information about electrical ratings of the capacitor, such as working voltage and temperature coefficient. The capacitor shown in Figure117 represents either a mica capacitor or a moulded paper capacitor. To determine the type and value of the

g n i n

capacitor, hold the capacitor so that the three arrows point left to right (>). The first dot at the base of the arrow sequence (the left-most dot) represents the capacitor type. This dot is black, white, silver, or the same color as the capacitor body.

i a r T

Mica is represented by a black or white dot and paper by a silver dot or dot having the same color as the body of the capacitor. The two dots


to the immediate right of the type dot indicate the first and second digits of the capacitance value. The dot at the bottom right represents the multiplier to be used. The multiplier represents picofarads. The dot in the bottom centre indicates the tolerance value of the capacitor.



Page 241



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 117: 6 dot colour code for mica and moulded paper capacitors



Page 242


Notice that this type of mica capacitor differs from the one shown in Figure 117; in that the arrow is solid instead of broken. This type of mica capacitor is read in the same manner as the one shown in Figure 118, with one exception: the first dot indicates the first digit. (Note: Because this type of capacitor is always type dot mica)


i a r T

g n i n


Page 243



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 118: Mica capacitor color code.-3 dots



Page 244


Example:

Read the capacitor color code on the mica capacitor (Figure 119).

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M Figure 119


i a r T

g n i n


Page 245


Solution:


1) Hold the capacitor so the arrows point left to right. 2) Read the first dot.

i a r T

g n i n

3) Read the first digit dot.

4) Read the second digit dot and apply it to the first digit.

5) Read the multiplier dot and multiply the first two digits by multiplier (Remember that the multiplier is in picofarads). 6) Lastly, read the tolerance dot.

According to the above coding, the capacitor is a mica capacitor whose capacitance is 1200 pF with a tolerance of ±6%

The Figure 120 shows how capacity of miniature tantalum electrolytic capacitors is marked by colors. The first two colors represent the first two digits and have the same values as with resistors. The third color represents the multiplier, which the first two digits should be multiplied by, to get the capacity value expressed in µF. The fourth color represents the maximal working voltage value. For Training Purposes Only


Page 246


One important note on the working voltage: capacitor voltage mustn't exceed the maximal working voltage as capacitor may get destroyed. In case when the voltage between nodes where the capacitor is about to be connected is unknown, the "worst" case should be considered. There is the possibility that, due to malfunction of some other component, voltage on capacitor equals the power supply voltage. If, for

g n i n

example, the power supply is 12V battery, then the maximal working voltage of used capacitors should exceed 12V, for security's sake.


i a r T


Page 247



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 120: Marking the tantalum electrolytic capacitors



Page 248


Capacitor Number Code

A number code is often used on small capacitors where printing is difficult:

• The 1st number is the 1st digit, • The 2nd number is the 2nd digit, • The 3rd number is the number of zeros to give the capacitance in pF.


• Ignore any letters - they just indicate tolerance and voltage rating.

For example: 102 means 1OOOpF = 1nF (not 102pF)

i a r T

g n i n

For example: 472J means 4700pF =4.7nF (J means 5% tolerance).



Page 249


Question:

Examine the three capacitors shown below. What is the capacitance of each?


i a r T

g n i n

Answer:

(1) 26 mF or 260,000 pF (2) 630 pF

(3) 9600 pF.



Page 250


3.9.5 Calculations of capacitance and voltage in series circuits and parallel circuits

3.9.5.1 Capacitor in Series

i a r T

g n i n

The overall effect of connecting capacitors in series is to move the plates of the capacitors further apart. This is shown in Figure 121. Notice that the junction between C1 and C2 has both a negative and a positive charge. This causes the junction to be essentially neutral. The total


capacitance of the circuit is developed between the left plate of C1 and the right plate of C2. Because these plates are farther apart, the total value of the capacitance in the circuit is decreased.

FIGURE 121: Capacitors in series



Page 251


The current through capacitors in series stays the same, but the voltage across each capacitor can be different. The sum of the potential differences (voltage) is equal to the total voltage. Solving for the total capacitance (CT) of capacitors connected in series is similar to solving for the total resistance (RT) of resistors connected in parallel. Note the similarity between the formulas for RT and CT:


i a r T

g n i n

If the circuit contains more than two capacitors, use the above formula. If the circuit contains only two capacitors, use the below formula:

Note: All values for CT, C1, C2, and C3... C n should be in farads. It should be evident from the above formulas that the total capacitance of capacitors in series is less than the capacitance of any of the individual capacitors.



Page 252


Example 1:

Determine the total capacitance of a series circuit containing three capacitors whose values are 0.01µF, 0.25 µF, and 50,000 pF, respectively.

Solution:


i a r T

g n i n

The total capacitance of 0.008µF is slightly smaller than the smallest capacitor (0.01µF).



Page 253


Example 2:

What is the total capacitance of a circuit that contains two capacitors (10 µF and 0.1 µF) wired together in series?

CT = C1 C2 C1 + C2


CT = 10 X 0.1

µF

10 + 0.1

CT = 1

µF

i a r T

g n i n

10.1

CT = 0.099µF or 0.1µF



Page 254


3.9.5.2 Capacitors in Parallel

When capacitors are connected in parallel, one plate of each capacitor is connected directly to one terminal of the source, while the other plate of each capacitor is connected to the other terminal of the source.

g n i n

Figure 122 shows all the negative plates of the capacitors connected together, and all the positive plates connected together. CT, therefore,

i a r T

appears as a capacitor with a plate area equal to the sum of all the individual plate areas. As previously mentioned, capacitance is a direct function of plate area. Connecting capacitors in parallel effectively increases plate area and thereby increases total capacitance.

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M Figure 122: Parallel Capacitive Circuit



Page 255


The total capacitance of the circuit may by calculated using the formula:

CT = Cl + C2 + C3+........ Cn

g n i n

Where all capacitances are in the same units. Capacitors in a parallel configuration each have the same potential difference (voltage). For

i a r T

capacitors connected in parallel the total capacitance is the sum of all the individual capacitances.



Page 256


Example 1:

Determine the total capacitance in a parallel capacitive circuit containing three capacitors whose values are 0.03µF, 2.0 µF, and 0.25 µF, respectively.

Given:


C1 = 0.03.uF C2 =2.uF

C3 = 0.25.uF

i a r T

g n i n

Solution:

CT = C1 + C2 + C3

CT = 0.03uF + 2.0µF + 0.25uF CT = 2.28uF



Page 257


Example 2:

What is the total capacitance of a circuit in which four capacitors (10µF, 21µF, 0.1µF and 2µF) are connected in parallel?

CT = C1+C2+C3+C4 CT = 10uF+21uF+O.luF+2uF CT = 33.1.uF


i a r T

g n i n

The reason for putting capacitors in parallel is to increase the total amount of charge stored. In other words, increasing the capacitance also increases the amount of energy that can be stored. Its expression is:

In parallel the effective area of the combined capacitor has increased, increasing the overall capacitance. While in series, the distance between the plates has effectively been increased, reducing the overall capacitance. In practice capacitors will be placed in series as a means of economically obtaining very high voltage capacitors, for example for smoothing ripples in a high voltage power supply. Three "600 volt maximum" capacitors in series will increase their overall working voltage to 1800 volts.

This is of course offset by the capacitance obtained being only one third of the value of the capacitors used. This can be countered by connecting 3 of these series set-ups in parallel, resulting in a 3x3 matrix of capacitors with the same overall capacitance as an individual capacitor but operable under three times the voltage. In this application, a large resistor would be connected across each capacitor to ensure For Training Purposes Only


Page 258


that the total voltage is divided equally across each capacitor and also to discharge the capacitors for safety when the equipment is not in use. Another application is for use of polarized capacitors in alternating current circuits; the capacitors are connected in series, in reverse polarity, so that at any given time one of the capacitors is not conducting.


i a r T

g n i n


Page 259


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 260


3.9.6 Exponential charge and discharge of a capacitor 3.9.6.1 Charging a Capacitor

g n i n

In order to better understand the action of a capacitor in conjunction with other components, the charge and discharge actions of a purely capacitive circuit are analyzed first. For ease of explanation, the capacitor and voltage source shown in Figure 124 are assumed to be perfect (no internal resistance), although this is impossible in practice.


i a r T

In Figure 124(A), an uncharged capacitor is shown connected to a four-position switch. With the switch in position 1 the circuit is open and no voltage is applied to the capacitor. Initially each plate of the capacitor is a neutral body and until a difference of potential is impressed across the capacitor, no electrostatic field can exist between the plates.

To charge the capacitor, the switch must be thrown to position 2, which places the capacitor across the terminals of the battery. Under the assumed perfect conditions, the capacitor would reach full charge instantaneously. However, the charging action is spread out over a period of time in the following discussion so that a step-by-step analysis can be made.

At the instant the switch is thrown to position 2 (Figure 124(B)), a displacement of electrons occurs simultaneously in all parts of the circuit. This electron displacement is directed away from the negative terminal and toward the positive terminal of the source (the battery). A brief surge of current will flow as the capacitor charges.



Page 261



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 124: Charging a Capacitor



Page 262


If it were possible to analyze the motion of the individual electrons in this surge of charging current, the following action would be observed. See Figure 125

g n i n

At the instant the switch is closed, the positive terminal of the battery extracts an electron from the bottom conductor. The negative terminal of the battery forces an electron into the top conductor. At this same instant an electron is forced into the top plate of the capacitor and another is

i a r T

pulled from the bottom plate. Thus, in every part of the circuit a clockwise displacement of electrons occurs simultaneously.


As electrons accumulate on the top plate of the capacitor and others depart from the bottom plate, a difference of potential develops across the capacitor. Each electron forced onto the top plate makes that plate more negative, while each electron removed from the bottom causes the bottom plate to become more positive. Notice that the polarity of the voltage that builds up across the capacitor is such as to oppose the source voltage. The source voltage (emf) forces current around the circuit of Figure 125 in a clockwise direction.

The emf developed across the capacitor, however, has a tendency to force the current in a counter clockwise direction, opposing the source emf. As the capacitor continues to charge, the voltage across the capacitor rises until it is equal to the source voltage. Once the capacitor voltage equals the source voltage, the two voltages balance one another and current ceases to flow in the circuit.



Page 263



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 125: Electron motion during charge.



Page 264


In studying the charging process of a capacitor, you must be aware that no current flows through the capacitor. The material between the plates of the capacitor must be an insulator. However, to an observer stationed at the source or along one of the circuit conductors, the action has all the appearances of a true flow of current, even though the insulating material between the plates of the capacitor prevents the current from having a complete path. The current that appears to flow through a capacitor is called displacement current.

i a r T

g n i n

When a capacitor is fully charged and the source voltage is equaled by the counter electromotive force (cemf) across the capacitor, the electrostatic field between the plates of the capacitor is maximum. Since the electrostatic field is maximum the energy stored in the dielectric is


also maximum.

If the switch is now opened as shown in Figure 126(A), the electrons on the upper plate are isolated. The electrons on the top plate are attracted to the charged bottom plate. Because the dielectric is an insulator, the electrons cannot cross the dielectric to the bottom plate. The electrostatic field will effectively trap the charges on both plates and the capacitor will remain charged indefinitely. You should note at this point that the insulating dielectric material in a practical capacitor is not perfect and small leakage current will flow through the dielectric. This current will eventually dissipate the charge. However, a high quality capacitor may hold its charge for a month or more.

Review briefly, when a capacitor is connected across a voltage source, a surge of charging current flows. This charging current develops a cemf across the capacitor which opposes the applied voltage. When the capacitor is fully charged, the cemf is equal to the applied voltage and charging current ceases. At full charge, the electrostatic field between the plates is at maximum intensity and the energy stored in the dielectric is at maximum. If the charged capacitor is disconnected from the source, the charge will be retained for some period of time. The length of time the charge is retained depends on the amount of leakage current present. Since electrical energy is stored in the capacitor, a charged capacitor can act as a source emf. For Training Purposes Only


Page 265


3.9.6.2 Discharging a Capacitor

To discharge a capacitor, the charges on the two plates must be neutralized. This is accomplished by providing a conducting path between

g n i n

the two plates as shown in Figure 126(B). With the switch in position (4) the excess electrons on the negative plate can flow to the positive plate and neutralize its charge. When the capacitor is discharged, the distorted orbits of the electrons in the dielectric return to their normal

i a r T

positions and the stored energy is returned to the circuit. It is important for you to note that a capacitor does not consume power. The energy the capacitor draws from the source is recovered when the capacitor is discharged.

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M Figure 126: Discharging a Capacitor



Page 266


Question

1. State what happens to the electrons in a capacitor circuit when:

The capacitor is charging The capacitor is discharging.


2. A 5000 µF capacitor is charged to 12.0 V and discharged through a 2000Ω resistor. (a) What is the time constant?

i a r T

g n i n

(b) What is the voltage after 13 s?

(c) What is the half-life of the decay?

(d) How long would it take the capacitor to discharge to 2.0 V?



Page 267


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 268


3.9.7 RC Time constants

The time require to charge a capacitor to 63 percent (actually 63.2 percent) of full charge or to discharge it to 37 percent (actually 36.8

g n i n

percent) of its initial voltage is known as the TIME CONSTANT (TC) of the circuit. The charge and discharge curves of a capacitor are shown in Figure 127.


i a r T

Figure 127: RC time constant



Page 269


The value of the time constant in seconds is equal to the product of the circuit resistance in ohms and the circuit capacitance in farads. The value of one time constant is expressed mathematically as t = RC. Some forms of this formula used in calculating RC time constants are:


i a r T

g n i n

Question:

What is the RC time constant of a series RC circuit that contains a 12-megohm resistor and a 12-microfarad capacitor?

t = R (mégohms) x C (microfarads) t= 12 x 106x 12 x10-6 t =144 seconds



Page 270


As a capacitor becomes charged, the current flow decreases because the voltage developed by the capacitor increases over time and opposes the source voltage. Therefore, the rate of charge of a capacitor is reduced over time. The amount time required to charge and discharge a capacitor is a very important factor in the design of electronic circuits. Resistors are often used in combination with capacitors in

g n i n

order to control the charge and discharge time necessary for the intended application. Resistance directly affects the time required to charge a capacitor. As resistance increases, it takes more time to charge a capacitor. The amount of time for the capacitor to become fully charged in a resistive-capacitive (RC) circuit depends on the values of the capacitor and resistor.


i a r T

Figure 128 shows the rate of charge of a capacitor in a RC circuit. Note that the rate of charge greatly decreases over time. The latter part of its charging time is many times longer than the first part. In fact, a capacitor reaches 63.2% of its charge in one fifth of the time it takes to become fully charged. Because of this, capacitors in actual applications are generally not fully charged. Capacitors in circuits are generally charged to just 63.2% of full capacity. The time required for a capacitor to charge to 63.2% of its full capacity is referred as its RC (resistivecapacitive) time constant.

A large time constant means the capacitor charges slowly. Note that the time constant is a property of the circuit containing the capacitance and resistance; it is not a property of a capacitor alone.



Page 271



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 128: The Rate of Charge of a Capacitor in a RC Circuit



Page 272


The time constant is the time taken for the charging (or discharging) current (I) to fall to 1/e of its initial value (lo). 'e' is the base of natural logarithms, an important number in mathematics (likeπ). e = 2.71828 (to 6 significant figures) so we can roughly say that the time constant is the time taken for the current to fall to 1/3 of its initial value.

g n i n

After each time constant the current falls by 1/e (about 1/3). After 5 time constants (5RC) the current has fallen to less than 1% of its initial

i a r T

value and we can reasonably say that the capacitor is fully charged, but in fact the capacitor takes for ever to charge fully. Figure 129 shows how the voltage (V) increases as the capacitor charges. At first the voltage changes rapidly because the current is large; but as the current


decreases, the charge builds up more slowly and the voltage increases more slowly. After 5 time constants (5RC) the capacitor is almost fully charged with its voltage almost equal to the supply voltage. We can reasonably say that the capacitor is fully charged after 5RC, although really charging continues for ever (or until the circuit is changed).

Figure 129 (graph) shows how the current (I) decreases as the capacitor discharges. The initial current (lo) is determined by the initial voltage across the capacitor (Va) and resistance (R):

Initial current,



Page 273



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 129: Graphs showing the current and voltage for a capacitor charging (time constant = RC)

Note that the current graphs are the same shape for both charging and discharging a capacitor. This type of graph is an example of exponential decay.



Page 274


Figure 130 (graph) shows how the voltage (V) decreases as the capacitor discharges. At first the current is large because the voltage is large, so charge is lost quickly and the voltage decreases rapidly. As charge is lost the voltage is reduced making the current smaller so the rate of discharging becomes progressively slower.

g n i n

After 5 time constants (5RC) the voltage across the capacitor is almost zero and we can reasonably say that the capacitor is fully discharged, although really discharging continues for ever (or until the circuit is changed).


i a r T


Page 275



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 130: Graphs showing the current and voltage for a capacitor discharging (time constant = RC)



Page 276


3.9.8 Testing of capacitors

An analogue multimeter or digital multimeter set to high resistance range can be used to test a capacitor.

(1) Non-polarized Types - If the resistance is less than about 1M leaking and is faulty.


i a r T

Note -- there may be an initial short burst of current as the capacitor charges up.

(2) Polarized Types

g n i n

it is allowing current from the battery in the multimeter to 'pass' so it is

- For the dielectric to form in these types a positive voltage must be applied to the positive side of the capacitor (marked + or a groove). In most analogue multimeters the terminal marked - (black) is the positive of the internal battery when selected to the ohms setting.

For digital meters the manufacturer’s instructions will have to be consulted. When the capacitor is first connected to the multimeter its resistance is low but rises as the dielectric forms, otherwise the capacitor is faulty.

Capacitor is extensively used in electronic circuit as well as high energy ignition unit and strobe light systems.



Page 277


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 278

EASA PART 66 CAT B1.1 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS MAGNETISM (EASA 3.10 L2)

3.10 MAGNETISM (EASA Ref 3.10) Level 2 3.10.1 (a) Theory of magnetism

Introduction

i a r T

g n i n

There is a close relationship between electricity and magnetism. Not only can an electric current generate magnetic effects, but also a movement of a magnet can generate electrical effects.


Electromagnets can be constructed which may to be used to convert electrical energy into mechanical energy.

The movement of a magnet causes an electric current to be set up in a conductor. So it is used to convert mechanical energy into electrical energy.

The most common method of converting mechanical energy into electrical energy is by the use of magnetism in a generator. In an electric motor electrical energy is converted into mechanical energy by the use of magnetism.



Page 279

EASA PART 66 CAT B1.1 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS MAGNETISM (EASA 3.10 L2)

3.10.2 (a) Properties of a magnet

The Nature of Magnetism

g n i n

Magnetism is a property that is associated with an electric charge in motion. An electron, of course, is such a charge. As an electron moves

i a r T

about the nucleus of an atom in an orbital path, it also spins on its own axis. This spinning motion, in effect, causes each electron to be a tiny magnet.


The polarity of the magnetic field that is generated by a spinning electron is determined by the direction of the spin. In most materials, the number of electrons spinning in one direction approximately equals the number of those spinning in the opposite direction. As a result, for all practical purposes, the materials are magnetically neutral and do not exhibit external magnetic characteristics.



Page 280

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS MAGNETISM (DCAM 3.10 L2)

3.10.3 (a) Action of magnet suspended in the Earth's magnetic field

Refer to Figure 131.

If freely suspended, a natural magnet comes to rest pointing in a north-south direction.


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 131: Magnets in Earth Magnetic Field



Page 281


This is because the earth itself is a large natural magnet with a north pole and a south pole, and the magnetism or magnetic force of attraction pulls the magnet into a magnetic north-south line.

g n i n

The magnetic field or 'lines of force' between north and south poles are invisible. Thus a magnet is a piece of material which has a magnetic field surrounding it. Such magnets are also called permanent magnets. Refer to Figure 132.


i a r T

Figure 132: Magnets Field and Poles of the Earth



Page 282



Modern permanent magnets are made of steel. They exist in many different shapes, for example, compass needles, bars, rods, horseshoes and rings.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 133: Shapes of Magnets



Page 283


3.10.3.1 (a) Magnetic Poles The two ends of a magnet have different characters. One end is called a 'south-seeking pole', while the other is called a 'north seeking pole'.

g n i n

As described before a bar magnet will align it self in a north south direction if the freedom of movements are allowed. The ends of a magnet are usually referred to simply as the north and the south poles. The north pole of a magnet is defined as that end which points towards the

i a r T

north pole of the earth. The south pole of a magnet points towards the south pole of the earth. Refer to Figure 134.

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M FIGURE 134: Magnetic Poles



Page 284


3.10.3.2 (a) Magnetic Attraction and Repulsion

g n i n

When two magnets are placed close together, according to how they are placed they will either attract or repel each other.

Refer to Figure 135


i a r T

FIGURE 135: Magnetic Attraction

The north pole of one magnet will tend to draw towards itself to the south pole of an adjacent magnet and vice versa. It can be seen by means of the iron filings that magnetic lines from a north pole are drawn into an adjoining south pole.



Page 285


Refer to Figure 136

Two north poles or two south poles close together will tend to push away from one another. The iron filings show that the magnetic lines from

g n i n

two adjoining north poles or south poles are forced apart. The content or the last two paragraphs can be summed up by saying that, in common with the charges in atomic particles:

• unlike poles attract


• like poles repel.

i a r T

FIGURE 136: Magnetic Repulsion



Page 286


3.10.3.3 (a) Magnetic Field and Direction


g n i n

The area immediately surrounding a magnet, in which magnetic attraction occurs, is said to contain a magnetic field. A magnetic field, in the

i a r T

form of lines of force, can be mapped out on a sheet of paper by using some iron filings (Figure 137, detail a).


The magnetic lines of force travel outside from and to the poles of the magnet in the direction north to south or more correctly, from the northseeking pole to the south-seeking pole. Inside the magnet the lines of force travel from the South Pole towards the North Pole (Figure 137, detail b).

FIGURE 137: Magnetic Field and Direction



Page 287


3.10.4 (a)

Magnetization and demagnetization

Natural magnet is a certain type of iron or lodestone that has the property of attracting and picking up pieces of iron and steel.


i a r T

g n i n

If a piece of soft iron is placed near to one end of a magnet, the iron becomes slightly magnetized. This process is called induction, meaning


that magnetism has been led into the iron, or induced. If the soft iron is stroked a number of times in one direction with the end of the magnet, the iron becomes even more strongly magnetized.

FIGURE 138: Magnetization by Induction



Page 288


Another method to magnetize a material is to place the material (steel bar) in a current carrying solenoid. The polarity of the magnet can be found by applying right hand grasp rule.

g n i n

For demagnetizing, it is necessary to remove the alignment of the molecular magnets. There are three different methods of achieving that:

a) by heat


b) by mechanical force – dropping or hammering

c) by an altering magnetic field – using alternating current

i a r T

Place the magnet inside a solenoid which is carrying alternating current. While the current is still flowing the magnet is withdrawn slowly to a distance of several meters in an E – W direction. Refer Figure 139

The magnet is held in an E – W direction so that it will not have any residual magnetism due to the earth magnetic field. This method of demagnetizing is sometimes called de –Gaussing.



Page 289



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 139: Demagnetization



Page 290


3.10.5 (a) Magnetic shielding

It is necessary to isolate equipment from the effect of magnetic fields. To protect the equipment from errors due to a magnetic field, shielding is required.



i a r T

g n i n

Where magnetic flux would be undesirable (e.g. in the vicinity of a watch) a magnetic screen of iron is used. This has the effect of concentrating the flux within itself so that it does not penetrate the surrounding air space. The soft iron magnetic flux concentrating effect is called permeability, i.e. soft iron has a high permeability and air has a low permeability



Page 291



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 140: Magnetic Screen



Page 292


3.10.6 (a) Various types of magnetic material 3.10.6.1 (a) Magnetic Materials

g n i n

It is useful to know about magnetism which types of materials are magnetic, i.e. which materials are attracted to a magnet and which are not.

i a r T

In general there are three different kinds of materials related to the study of magnetism. A magnet can be used to lift a pair of scissors, nails, tacks and needles. Those materials which attracted to a magnet are called magnetic materials. Another name for them is ferromagnetic


materials. These materials are iron, nickel and cobalt. A magnet cannot pick up a piece of wood or paper. These materials are called nonmagnetic. Another name for them is paramagnetic materials.

There is a third class of materials, called diamagnetic, that act in a very unusual way near a strong magnet. Instead of being attracted to a magnet as are magnetic materials, or indifferent to the magnet as are nonmagnetic materials, diamagnetic materials actually move away from a magnetic field. So far, diamagnetism has not been put to any large practical use because the effect is relatively small. It would take a very strong magnet to move diamagnetic materials with any noticeable force. If pieces of iron become magnetized by a loadstone they are called artificial magnets.

Some of the artificial magnets are able to retain their magnetism for long periods of time, while others lose their magnetism quickly. The ones that lose their magnetism quickly are called temporary magnets, while the ones that can retain their magnetism over a long period of time are called permanent magnets.



Page 293


There are applications in electricity in which a material is need to become magnetized for a short period of time, and there are also applications where permanent magnets are wanted. Soft iron is a material that is used for making temporary magnets. This name is very misleading. There is nothing soft about the iron. Instead, the name comes from the fact that it cannot retain a magnetic field for any period of time. Refer to Figure 141.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 141: Magnetic Material



Page 294


Magnetic materials are divided into ferromagnetic materials and non-magnetic materials.

Ferromagnetic materials are materials such as iron, cobalt and nickel. Most of their alloys which can be magnetized have a high flux concentrating power. Iron for example has a flux-multiplying factor µ of about 5000.

i a r T

g n i n

Non-magnetic materials are those that have no flux-multiplying factor. Its permeability (µ) is around one. Non-magnetic materials are copper, aluminium, water and air. Air is a standard and has a permeability of one.



Page 295


3.10.7 (a) Electromagnets Construction 3.10.7.1 (a) Application of Electromagnets

g n i n

A typical application of an electromagnet is the relay or solenoid. When a current (control current) is fed to an electromagnet the lever-like armature is attracted. Depending on the construction this closes the contact (normally-open contact) and an external circuit is closed (Figure

i a r T

142, detail a) or this opens the contact (normally-closed contact) and an external circuit is interrupted (Figure 142, detail b).

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M FIGURE 142: Construction of Relay

When the control circuit is interrupted the armature returns to its initial position through a restoring force of a spring.



Page 296


In the circuit diagrams of electric equipment it is necessary to identify individual relays and their contacts by a system of numbering. Therefore they are usually annotated as shown in Figure 143. Furthermore the relay number (RL 2) and the denominator (3) that documents the number of contacts associated with the relay is shown.


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 143: Circuit Symbol of a Relay



Page 297


3.10.7.2 (a)

Principles of operation


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 144: Various Symbols of Relays As Used In Circuit Diagrams.



Page 298



By the use of a relay it is possible to prevent excessive voltage drop across long length of cable. The electrical equipment can be switched

g n i n

ON/OFF from a remote point by the use of a relay. When the switch at the remote point is switched ON relay RL 2 becomes energized and contact RL 2/1 closes thereby connecting the equipment to the supply. There is now only a small voltage drop in the connecting cable. The current taken by the relay is small.


i a r T


Page 299



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 145: Remote Switching using a Relay



Page 300


Refer to Figure 146

With a relay, a heavier current can be switched ON or OFF by a weak control current, sometimes over long distances. In this connection

g n i n

distinction is made between fields of application, e.g. heavy and light-current relays or according to the duty, e.g. protective, indicating, power and telegraph relays.


i a r T

FIGURE 146: Heavy Working Current switched by a Relay



Page 301


3.10.8 (a) Hand clasp rules to determine: magnetic field around current carrying conductor 3.10.8.1 (a) the Magnetic Effect of Current

g n i n

Whenever a current flows through a conductor a magnetic field is developed. There are two methods for determining the field direction. Refer to Figure 147


i a r T

FIGURE 147: Magnetic Field around a Conductor



Page 302



Figure 148 shows the 'right hand rule', whereby the thumb points into the current direction through a conductor and the other fingers point into the magnetic field direction


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 148: Right Hand Rule



Page 303



Figure 149 shows the 'corkscrew rule'. When the current flows into the paper the magnetic field is clockwise. When the current direction is out of the paper the magnetic field is counter-clockwise


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 149: Corkscrew Rule



Page 304


3.10.8.2 (a) Direction of Current within a Wire

The direction of the current within a wire is indicated as follows:

• an arrow indicates direction of current flow • the cross represents tail of arrow pointing into the page • the dot represents head of arrow pointing out of the page.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 150: Direction of Current



Page 305


3.10.8.3 (a) The Magnetic Field of a Coil

A coil carrying a current is surrounded by a magnetic field like a permanent magnet. One end of the coil acts like a south pole the opposite pole acts like a north pole.

i a r T

g n i n

By reversing the current direction in the coil its magnetic poles are interchanged. If a conductor is straight piece of wire a weak magnetic field of little practical use is developed around the wire. Although the magnetic flux has direction the conductor has no north or South Pole.




Page 306


By changing the shape of the conductor its magnetic properties can be greatly improved. Figure151 shows a view of a short piece of wire twisted into a loop. Simply forming the loop improves the magnetic characteristics in three ways:

• brings the flux lines together • concentrate the flux lines at the centre • creates north and south pole.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 151: North and South Pole of a Coil



Page 307


Refer to Figure 152

The north pole of an electromagnet can be determined by the use of the 'right hand grasp rule'. The fingers of the right hand comprehend the coil and point into the current direction. The thumb points to north.

g n i n

The flux density of an electromagnet depends on the current in the coil, the number of turns and the core material, if arranged within the coil.

i a r T

Iron within a coil concentrates the flux and therefore increases the strength of the magnet. The iron core makes the magnetic force stronger, so that heavy loads can be carried. Comparison of coils with different numbers of turns shows that with a higher number of turns a smaller


current is sufficient to hold a load of equal weight.

As well as its high load bearing capacity the electromagnet has the further advantage, in comparison with a permanent magnet, that this capacity can be varied within wide limits by varying the supply current.

FIGURE 152: North-South Direction of a Coil 3.10.8.4 (a) Magnetic Circuit



Page 308



The flux lines or lines of force surrounding a permanent magnet or a current carrying solenoid are all continuous or completely closed. The

g n i n

magnetic circuit is formed by the closed path of magnetic flux. One of the simplest forms of magnetic circuit is shown in Figure 153 where part of the magnetic circuit is in the iron and part is in the air gap.


i a r T

FIGURE 153: Magnetic Circuit



Page 309


3.10.9 (b) Magnetic Terms 3.10.9.1 (b) Magneto motive force

g n i n

The magneto motive force (mmf) of a magnet is that force which tends to produce a magnetic field. The c.g.s system unit of magneto motive

i a r T

force is the gilberts, which is represented by the symbol F. One Gilbert is equal to that magnitude of force required to establish a flux of one Maxwell in a flux path or magnetic circuit having a reluctance of one unit.


The SI unit of mmf is the ampere-turns mmf = I x N A-t 3.10.9.2 (b) the Magnetic Field Strength

The magnetic field strength (symbol H) is the intensity of the magnetic force that sets up the magnetic flux density (symbol B) in an electromagnet (magnetic circuit). It can be compared with the EMF that forces a current (I) through an electric circuit.

The magnetic field strength is determined as:

H = IN A-t/m l



Page 310


3.10.9.3 (b) Magnetic Flux and Flux Density

Magnetic Flux

g n i n

The lines of force within magnetic fields form a magnetic flux (symbol φ - Greek letter phi), a term which indicates that what issues or flows out from a magnet. The SI unit of magnetic flux is Weber. The cgs unit is Maxwell.


Flux Density

i a r T

The more powerful the magnet the greater is the amount of flux which it generates. For some applications it is the concentration of flux or flux density (symbol B) which is important, rather than the total amount of flux generated by the magnet. Flux density is equal to magnetic flux per unit area, B = /A Tesla or Weber/m2



Page 311


3.10.9.4 (b) Permeability

Permeability or flux-multiplying factor (symbolµ) is a measure of how easily a magnetic flux can be set up in a material. Air and most materials

g n i n

(including most metals) have a multiplying factor of approximately one. Iron placed in a magnetic field causes the lines of flux to concentrate in it. In doing so the iron itself becomes magnetized. The iron generates 'flux lines'· of its own so more 'lines' are added to the original flux. Thus the presence of iron increases the flux density. Refer to Figure 154


µ = µo µr = B/H

i a r T

Where,

µ - Absolute permeability

µo - Permeability of Free Space = 4 x 10-7 µr - Relative permeability

B - Flux densityFigure

154: Effect of Iron in a Magnetic Field

H - Field strength (Magnetizing force)



Page 312


3.10.9.5 (b) Hysteresis loop

Hysteresis

g n i n

The B-H curve shows the magnetic characteristics of a material when the magnetic field strength is increased to eventual saturation. If the

i a r T

magnetizing force is removed some magnetism may remain with the material. This effect is known as 'hysteresis'. Hysteresis then is the lag of flux density (B) behind the magnetic field strength (H).


Refer to Figure 155

If the magnetic field strength is increased from zero in a positive direction the flux density B rises as in a normal B-H curve

On reducing the magnetizing force H to zero again the flux density B does not follow its original path to zero but follows the path QR. When the material has first reached saturation the flux density at R is called the remanence or residual magnetism. If the material has not reached saturation the flux density at R is called remnant flux density.



Page 313



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 155: Remanence or residual Magnetism



Page 314


3.10.9.6 (b) Retentivity

Retentivity is a measure of the magnetism retained by a material over a long period of time. Retentivity must not be confused with remnant since in some materials remnant is quickly reduced to zero under normal conditions. 3.10.9.7 (b) Coercive force


i a r T

g n i n

As shown in Figure 156, a negative value of magnetizing force H must be applied to reduce the flux density B to zero (S). The actual value of negative magnetizing force H necessary to do this is known as the 'coercive force'. If the material has first reached saturation this value is termed the 'coercivity' of the material.



Page 315



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 156: Coercive Force



Page 316


3.10.9.8 (b) Reluctance

g n i n

Reluctance is the opposition to magnetic flux and therefore the opposite or reciprocal of permeability. Reluctance can be compared to resistance in an electric circuit. A material has a permeability of 2700 (µ =2700) and a reluctance of:

1 µ


=

1

= 0.00037 A-t/Weber

2700

i a r T

3.10.9.9 (b) Saturation points

Refer to Figure 157

If the negative value of magnetizing force is increased past flux density B zero the material will eventually reach saturation T. This relationship shows that for a permanent magnet, a material with a high coercivity is required, i.e. the force required to 'remove' the magnetism must be very large.



Page 317



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 157: Negative Saturation



Page 318


3.10.9.10 (b) Eddy currents

As a magnetic field expands and collapses about the windings of an iron-core transformer, its flux lines cut across both the turns of the

g n i n

windings and the core. As a result, voltages are induced within the core itself. These voltages, in turn, establish currents called eddy currents that move through the core in circular paths.


3.10.10 (b)

Protection for care and storage of magnets

Refer to Figure 158

i a r T

If a permanent magnet is left for a long period without a keeper, or means of completing the magnetic path for the flux, its magnetic strength will soon decrease.

To prevent this, bar magnets are stored in pairs with their opposite poles adjacent, with small pieces of soft iron called keepers placed across their ends. The keepers become strong induced magnets keeping the magnetic domains in line via the closed loop of the magnets and keepers.



Page 319



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 158: Magnet with Keepers



Page 320


3.10.11 (b) Magnetic Field Strength/Flux Density Curve (B-H Curve)

Refer to Figure 159

g n i n

If a circuit is set up as shown in Figure 159 the current can be varied by moving the rheostat slider. Adjusting the current, changes the magnetic field strength (H) because:

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M H = I N Amperes.turns/meter L

i a r T

The formula shows that the number of turns and the length of the magnetic circuit are fixed values. Only the current is variable. Increasing the magnetic field strength (H) increases the flux density (B) because flux density (B) is proportional to:

• magnetic field strength (H)

• permeability (µ) of the magnetic circuit or core {multiplying factor.) Therefore B = µ . H



Page 321


f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M FIGURE 159: Current Control of a Coil

i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 160: B-H Curve for Air

The B-H curve for air is therefore linear (a straight line) because the permeability of air is one. For Training Purposes Only


Page 322


Refer to Figure 161

Figure 161 shows a typical ferromagnetic B-H curve. Increasing H from 0 to 1 results in a small increase of B due mostly to H in air. The ferromagnetic material has little effect; therefore the permeability of the ferromagnetic material is very low here.

i a r T

g n i n

Increasing H further from 1to 2 results in a large increase of B because the ferromagnetic material itself magnetizes, multiplying that increase of B due to H in air. The ferromagnetic material has a great effect on the increase of B. Therefore the permeability of the ferromagnetic


material rapidly increases to a large value.

Increasing H still further from 2 to 3 results in a small increase of B in fact the slope of the graph (rate of increase) is about the same as from 0 to 1. This is because the ferromagnetic material is fully magnetized so there are no more flux multiplying effects and the increase of B is due only to the air.

The ferromagnetic material has therefore reached saturation point, the material cannot be magnetized any further and the permeability decreases to a very low value.



Page 323



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 161: B-H Curve for a typical Ferromagnetic Material



Page 324


Refer to Figure 162

The flux density B always lags behind the magnetic field strength H because of the inertia required to change the magnetism in the material.


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 162: Hysteresis Loop of Magnetic Material



Page 325


3.10.12 (b) Characteristics of Ferromagnetic Materials

Ferromagnetic materials are classed as soft or hard magnetic materials. Soft and hard refer to how easily they magnetize and not whether they are mechanically hard or soft.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 163: Hysteresis Loop of Ferromagnetic Materials



Page 326


Hard Magnetic Material

A high magnetic field strength (H) is required to saturate a hard magnetic material and a high value of coercivity is required to remove the

g n i n

remanence of the magnet (residual magnetism). A hard magnetic material has therefore a good retentivity, making it a good permanent magnet.

i a r T

Because a high magnetic field strength H is necessary to magnetize a hard material, the area of the loop is large and therefore the energy (H


is proportional to current) to complete a full cycle or loop, is large. A hard material has therefore large hysteresis losses proportional to the hysteresis loop area and frequency of the magnet field strength H. A typical hard magnetic material is 'Alnico' used for permanent magnets. 'Alnico' alloys consist of aluminium, cobalt, nickel and iron.

Soft magnetic Materials

A low magnetic field strength (H) is required to saturate a soft magnetic material and a low value of coercivity is required to remove the remanence of the magnet (residual magnetism). A soft magnetic material has therefore a low retentivity making it unsuitable for use as a permanent magnet.

Because a low magnetic field strength is necessary to magnetize a soft material the area of the loop is small and the energy required to complete a full cycle or loop is small.

A soft material usually has a low hysteresis loss and high permeability values make it suitable for use when the magnetic field strength is alternating (AC current) driving the flux density through a complete hysteresis loop as in AC electric motors, generators and transformers. For Training Purposes Only


Page 327


Steel alloys such as permalloy or stalloy are suitable for AC use. For DC applications soft iron is used. Soft iron has a high permeability but also a relative high hysteresis loss.


i a r T

g n i n


Page 328


Refer to Figure 164

As most of the core materials used in electronic equipment is ferromagnetic it is important to compare the various characteristics exhibited by

g n i n

the most common used materials. The main characteristics of ferromagnetic materials can be ascertained by a study of their hysteresis loops as shown in Figure 164.


i a r T


Page 329



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 164: Hysteresis Loop of Ferromagnetic Materials



Page 330

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS INDUCTANCE / INDUCTOR (DCAM 3.11 L2)

3.11 INDUCTANCE/INDUCTOR (EASA Ref 3.11) Level 2 3.11.1 Electromagnetic Induction

g n i n

Electrical energy is generated in a generator or transformer as a result of movement between a magnetic field and conductors.

3.11.2 Action of inducing a voltage in a conductor moving in a magnetic field


i a r T

If a conductor is moved at right angles to a magnetic field this causes the free electrons in the conductor to concentrate at the right end side, thus producing a lack of electrons at the left hand end of the conductor. The result is that a potential difference (PD) is developed between the two ends of the conductor. This PD exists only while the conductor is cutting the magnetic flux lines of the magnet. When the conductor moves out of the magnetic field the electrons return to their original position and the PD disappears. The PD also disappears if the motion of the conductor is stopped in the magnetic field. Thus the conductor must move with respect to the field before a PD is developed.

Motion or a rate of change is essential to electromagnetic induction. Some external force must be applied to cause the conductor to move through the magnetic field. This mechanical force is converted into an electromotive force (EMF) by electromagnetic induction. Refer to Figure 165



Page 331



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 165: Conductor Moving in a Magnetic Field



Page 332


3.11.3.1 Effect of the following on the magnitude of an induced voltage: magnetic field strength

Refer to Figure 166

g n i n

Movement of a conductor in the same direction as the magnetic flux or movement of the magnetic flux in the same direction as the conductor generates no rate of change in flux and therefore no EMF is induced in circuit 'B'.


i a r T

FIGURE 166: No Induction of EMF



Page 333


3.11.3.2 Effect of the following on the magnitude of an induced voltage: rate of change of flux

Refer to Figure 167

g n i n

Increasing the angle of the conductor from zero to ninety degrees increase the rate of change of flux. Therefore the induced EMF increases

i a r T

from minimum at zero degrees to maximum at ninety degrees. Figure 167 shows that an amount of EMF is induced in circuit 'B' when the switch in circuit 'A' is closed or opened.

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M FIGURE 167: Induction of a Value of EMF



Page 334


Rate of Change of Flux

The rate of change of flux and the magnitude of EMF induced in a conductor is determined by:

• the speed of the conductor moving through the field • the length (proportional to number of turns) of the conductor in the field • the strength of the magnetic field


• the angle between conductor and field.

Faraday's law summarizes these four points as follows:

i a r T

g n i n

When a conductor cuts or is cut by a magnetic flux there is induced an EMF in it, which is proportional to the rate at which the flux is cut.

The induced EMF corresponds to the rate of change of flux divided by rate of change of time (speed). Furthermore the EMF corresponds to flux density (B) multiplied by length of conductor (I) and multiplied by the speed (V) of the conductor through the field at ninety degrees.

Expressed in a formula is EMF =B. I. V



Page 335


Refer to Figure 168

Direction of an induced EMF (Lenz's Law)

The induced EMF in a closed circuit sets up a current in the conductor which creates its own magnetic field. The conductor's magnetic field is:


• in front of the conductor's motion strengthened • behind the conductor's motion weakened.

i a r T

g n i n

Figure 168: Conductor cutting a Magnetic Field



Page 336


Refer to Figure 169

The magnetic fields of parallel conductors carrying current interact with each other to either attract or repel.

The magnetic field direction around the conductors is determined using the right hand/corkscrew rule. The result is:

i.

currents with same direction attract (Figure 169, detail a)

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M ii.

Currents with opposite direction repel (Figure 169, detail b).


i a r T

g n i n


Page 337


(a)


i a r T

g n i n

(b)

FIGURE 169: Field of Parallel Conductors



Page 338


3.11.4 Force on a Current-carrying Conductor in a magnetic Field

Refer to Figure 170

g n i n

When a current-carrying conductor is placed in a magnetic field an interaction of two fields happens. The current-carrying conductor's field is:

• strengthened on one side where the lines of force are all in the same direction


• weakened on the other side where the lines of force of the two fields oppose each other.

i a r T

A mechanical force moves the conductor from the strengthened field to the weakened field. Electrical energy is therefore converted into mechanical energy.

The direction of force can be determined as follows:

• the direction of the magnetic field (north to south) has to be noted • the current direction in the conductor has to be determined

• the right hand / corkscrew rule should be used to determine the field direction of the conductor.



Page 339



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 170: Current-carrying Conductor in a Magnetic Field



Page 340


Refer to Figure 171

Another method of determining the direction of force is the left hand motor rule.

g n i n

The magnetic flux is from north to south and the lines penetrate into the inside hand and tread out at the outside hand. The fingers point into current direction and the thumb indicates the direction of force.


The magnitude of this force is proportional to:

• the flux density of the magnetic field between the poles

• the conductor current (proportional to the current-carrying conductor's flux density)

i a r T

• the length of the current-carrying conductor in the magnetic field between the poles.

This can be expressed as:

Force = Flux Density. Current. Length.

F = B. I. I



Page 341



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 171: Left Hand Motor Rule



Page 342


3.11.5 Lenz's Law

A mechanical force is therefore required in order to oppose the change of flux (or 'cutting' of the magnetic field) by two interacting fields. The

g n i n

direction of the opposing force or drag of the conductor's magnetic field opposes the change of flux caused by the motion.

Lenz's law summarized this:


i a r T

The induced current always opposes the motion or change generating it. In an open conductor circuit an EMF is induced but there is no opposing force or drag because no current is flowing in the conductor to create a magnetic field.

Lenz's law can therefore be used to determine the direction of an induced current. Refer to Figure 172.

The direction of current can be determined as follows:

• the direction of conductor motion has to be noted

• the field direction of conductor has to be determined

• the right hand / corkscrew rule should be used in reverse to determine induced emf and current direction.



Page 343



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 172: Application of Lenz's Law



Page 344


3.11.6 Polarity determining rules

Refer to Figure 173

g n i n

The right hand generator rule is another method of determining the direction of induced EMF/ current in a conductor moving in a magnetic

i a r T

field. The magnetic flux is from north to south. The lines penetrate into the inside hand and tread out at the outside hand. The direction of conductor movement is indicated by the thumb and the fingers point into current direction.




Page 345



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 173: Right Hand Generator Rule



Page 346


3.11.7 Back EMF and Inductance

Back EMF

g n i n

As the current-carrying conductor moves through the magnetic field between the two poles of a magnet (main field) it 'cuts' the main field

i a r T

magnetic lines of flux. The flux in the conductor changes or there is a rate of change of flux. Therefore an EMF is induced in the currentcarrying conductor which opposes the conductor current that causes the conductor to move in the first place. This EMF is called 'back EMF' (-


EMF) because it opposes the applied voltage and reduces the effective voltage driving the current through the conductor. The applied EMF is always greater than the -EMF.

For the -EMF is also relevant: - EMF =B·I· V

Inductance

Inductance is the opposition to a change of current or change of flux. Moving a bar magnet past a coil induced an EMF in the coil. The resulting current's flux interacting with the bar magnet field causes a drag which is the opposition to a change of flux. The conductor therefore has inductance.

Any circuit which has an EMF induced into it by a change of current through that circuit possesses self-inductance (L).



Page 347


When the current is changed in the loop the strength of magnetic lines of flux are also changed. This change of flux 'cuts' the loop itself inducing a back EMF in the loop, which opposes the change of applied voltage. When the loop's applied voltage and current increases, a back EMF in the loop is induced; this opposes the applied voltage increase. Likewise decreasing the loop's applied voltage and current induces a back EMF in the loop, which opposes the applied voltage decrease.

i a r T

g n i n

In an inductance (inductive) circuit when current increases the circuit stores energy in the magnetic field. When current decreases the circuit gives up energy from the magnetic field. Refer to Figure 174 The energy stored in a magnetic field depends on the inductance and the coil current.


Energy = 1/2 L I

FIGURE 174: Magnetic Lines of Flux around a Loop



Page 348


All conductors possess self-inductance. But a conductor wound into the form of a coil has a much greater inductance because the turns 'cut' each other. A coil is therefore called an inductor.

The inductance (L) is measured in Henrys (H)

i a r T

g n i n

A circuit has an inductance of one Henry when a change of one ampere in one second causes an -EMF of one volt to be induced in the circuit.


Therefore is:

Inductance (L) =


- EMF (V)

= - EMF

Rate of change of current (A)

di

Rate of change of time (s)

dt


Page 349


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 350


3.11.8 Saturation Point

Refer to Figure 175. With increase of current in an iron cored coil, the inductance increases relatively linearly until saturation is reached. Increase of current after saturation, results in rapidly decreasing of inductance.

g n i n

When in a non-magnetic core (air, copper or aluminium) the current increases, the core does not saturate. Inductance therefore remains constant, independent of coil current.


i a r T

Inductance is proportional to the back EMF. Back EMF is proportional to the rate of change of flux or to the number of magnetic force which 'cut' the conductor. This 'cutting' depends on the following:

i. ii.

number of turns (N) squared (more turns, more 'cutting', and more induced back EMF) cross sectional area (A) of the core (the greater ' A’ is, the more flux 'cuts' the conductor)

iii.

permeability (µ) (the greater 'µ' is, the more flux 'cuts' the conductor and the greater the induced back EMF)

iv.

length (I) of the core (the less flux there is).

Therefore is the inductance (L) expressed as a formula: L = N2. A· µ (in Henrys H) l



Page 351



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 175: Inductance of Cored Coils



Page 352


Refer to Figure 176

Inductances or inductors are represented in circuit diagrams as shown in Figure 176.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 176: Inductor Symbols



Page 353


3.11.8.1 Time Constant

Refer to Figure 177

g n i n

A change of current induces a back EMF in an inductive circuit which opposes the change of current. Thus current changes are delayed in an inductive circuit.

i a r T

When the switch is moved to position B as shown in Figure 177, detail a), a high rate of change of circuit current is observed as seen at the


slope of the graph at time t = 0 (Figure 177, detail b)

A high back EMF is induced in the inductor L which opposes the rate of change of current flow. That means at the instant of closing the switch to position B:

• the time is nearly zero (t = 0)

• the rate of change of current is maximum

• the back EMF of the inductor is maximum and nearly equal to the applied voltage. • the I R (voltage) drop across the resistor R is minimum.

The current flow increases at a certain rate determined by inductance (L) and resistance (R). When the current has risen to 63.2 % of its final value the current has reached its 'time constant' value (t) as shown in Figure 177, detail b).



Page 354


The time constant (t) is announced in seconds and is calculated by:

L (Henrys) t

= R (Ohms)

i a r T

g n i n

At the time constant value of 1‘t the current is 63.2 % of the final current. Therefore the voltage drop across resistor R is 63.2 % of the applied voltage. The back EMF is 36.8%.


The applied voltage V (100 %) =36.8 % + 63.2 %. At five time constants

the current has reached its approximate final value.

• back EMF of inductor is minimum

• rate of change of current is minimum • current flow is maximum

• I· R (voltage) drop across the resistor R is maximum (applied voltage).



Page 355



i a r T

g n i n

(b)

FIGURE 177: Inductive Circuit and Current Rise Time



Page 356


Refer to Figure 178

When the switch is moved to position A (Figure 178, detail a) the opposite sequence of events to occur is caused. At the instant of opening the switch: •

maximum rate of change of current occurs

•

the back EMF of the inductor is maximum and tries to keep the current flowing.


i a r T

g n i n

The current flow decreases at a certain rate determined by inductance (L) and resistance (R). When the current has decreased 63.2 % the current has reached its time constant value of 1t (Figure 178, detail b).

At the time constant value of 1t (t = L/R) the current is 36.8 % of its maximum value. Therefore the voltage drop across resistor R is 36.8 % of the applied voltage. The inductor back EMF is also 36.8%. At five time constants t = 5. (L/R) the current is approximately zero. All of the energy has been discharged through the resistor.

If there is no resistor for the current to discharge as shown in Figure 178, detail a) the rate of change of current is much greater than, when the switch is closed. A much higher back EMF, many times the applied voltage could release all the stored inductive energy in a destructive arc across the opening switch contacts or even break down the insulation. This high back EMF is also dangerous to servicing personal.

Closing a switch induced a back EMF not higher the applied voltage, but opening a switch can induce a dangerously high back EMF many times the value of the applied voltage.



Page 357



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 178: Inductive Circuit and Current Decay Time



Page 358


Example:

A circuit has an inductance of 8 Henrys (H) and a resistance of 400

.

a} What is the time constant of the circuit?

b} What total time is required for the current to reach maximum?


a} t = L/R

T= 8H

400 Q

i a r T

g n i n

t = 0.02 seconds

b} Total time = 5. t

Total time = 5.x 0.02 seconds Total time = 0.1 seconds



Page 359


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 360


3.11.8. 2 Inductance in Series and Parallel

Inductances in Series

Refer to Figure 179

Inductances in series are calculated like resistors in series because the total voltage UT is:

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M UT = U1 + U2 + U3

i a r T

g n i n

The total inductance LT is therefore:

LT = L 1 + L2 + L3

Example:

L1 = 1 H, L2 = 0.5 H, L3 = 0.3 H LT=? LT = L 1 + L2 + L3

LT = 1 H + 0.5 H + 0.3 H LT =1.8H



Page 361



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 179: Inductance in Series



Page 362


Inductances in Parallel

Refer to Figure 180 Inductances in parallel are calculated like resistors in parallel because the total current IT is: IT = I1 + I 2 + I 3


With Ohms law is:

l=

U U = R L

i a r T

g n i n

Therefore is;

U1 U 2 U 3 + + L1 L2 L3

U is common for all inductances;

1 1 1 1 = + + Lt L1 L2 L3 For Training Purposes Only


Page 363



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 180: Inductance in Parallel



Page 364


Example;

L1 = 2H, L2 = 1H, L3 = 4H

LT =?

Solution;

1 1 1 1 = + + Lt L1 L2 L3


i a r T

g n i n

1 1 1 1 = + + Lt 2H 1H 4 H

1 2 4 1 = + + Lt 4H 4H 4H

1 7 = Lt 4H



Page 365


LT =

4 H 7

LT = 0.57H


i a r T

g n i n


Page 366


3.11.9 Mutual Induction

Consider two coils as shown in Figure 181. When the switch is closed the current rises therefore the magnetic field is changing,

g n i n

thus changing field in coil A ‘cuts’ coil B, inducing an emf into B. When the current reaches its steady DC value, there is no changing flux, so no emf is induced.


i a r T


Page 367



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 181: Mutual Induction



Page 368


Refer Figure 182,

When the switch is opened, the current starts to fall, there is a changing flux, and therefore an emf is induced. When the current falls to zero, there is no magnetic and no induced emf.

i a r T

g n i n

The effect of changing current in one coil and the resultant change of flux inducing an emf into a coil close to the first coil is called MUTUAL INDUCTION and the two coils are said to have mutual inductance.



Page 369



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 182: Mutual induction



Page 370


3.11.9.1 The effect the rate of change of primary current and mutual inductance has on induced emf .

If two circuits possess mutual inductance (M) of M henrys and there is a rate of change of current with respect to time (di/dt), the emf induced in either circuit is:

E = M di/dt volts


Factors affecting Mutual Inductance

(a) The number of turns on the first coil and the second coil.

i a r T

g n i n

(b) The physical size of the coils

(c) The permeability of the coils.

(d) The position of the coils with respect to each other.

M=K

L1 L 2

Where K is the coupling coefficient (between 0 and 1)



Page 371


3.11.10 Principle Uses of Inductors

g n i n

(a) Tuning - blocking out noise, unwanted frequencies and reducing hum in radio broadcasting stations and equipment.

i a r T

(b) DC filtering –when used as chokes in power supplies to remove hum and other types of fluctuation from the DC output.


(c) Filters – removing radio frequency (RF) interference.

(d) Small and compact transformers with 400Hz cycle frequency for aircraft.



Page 372


3.11.10.1 Types of Inductors

Inductors are classified by the type of core and the winding.

(a) Coupled inductors The magnetic flux of one inductor is linked to another inductor .E.g. Transformers


(b) Multi layer inductors

i a r T

g n i n

The coil is wound in multiple layers with insulation between each layer. This provides very high inductance.

(c) Ceramic core inductors

This type of inductor has high linearity, low hysteresis and low distortion.

(d) Molded inductors

These are low value inductors used in printed circuit board

(e) Power inductors

(f) Wide band chokes



Page 373


3.11.10.2 Types of Cores

The number of turns in the winding and the core material determines the capacity of the inductor. Cores made of dielectric material like

g n i n

ceramics, wood, paper, etc. provide small amounts of stored energy while cores made of ferrite substances have a much higher resistance and the power that can be released is very high.

Major types of cores are:


i a r T

Air core: These inductors do not have any metallic core. This type of core has the maximum linearity and the smallest distortion. But for large values of inductance, longer coils are needed and the inductor size becomes very large.

Solid Ferrite cores: These types provide the maximum resistance but they are not stable at higher values of inductance and the magnetic saturation is quickly reached. Ferrite materials are given designations like 33, 43, J/75, etc. Grade 33 is manganese zinc and used for the 1 KHz to 1 MHz range in loop stick antenna rods. Grade 43 nickel zinc has a high quality factor and is used as medium wave inductors in wide band transformers. Grade 77 is used in wide band transformers, power converters, EMI and acoustic filters and is used in the 0.001 to 1MHz band.

Powdered Ferrite cores: Powdered ferrite cores have greater linearity and distortion with predictable power curves. The core density is much greater and can be controlled by the compaction process. The ferrite material is given different grades like 0, 1, 12, 13, 15, 26, and so on. Grade 0 can be used for frequencies up to 200 MHz and the amount of inductance varies with the winding method. Grade 1 uses Carbonyl C



Page 374


and has good resistance, grade 12 is made of synthetic oxide, has a good quality factor and moderate stability in the range of 50 to 100 MHz, grade 26 is made of iron that is reduced by hydrogen and is used in DC chokes and EMI filters.

g n i n

Steel core: Cores made of iron nickel alloys are used when the requirements call for low resistance and high inductance. They are better then air cores. While selecting steel cores, it is necessary to note the power rating, as denser cores avoid problems of magnetic saturation. By

i a r T

using thin metal sheets that are suitably insulated, eddy currents are eliminated. Very thin air gaps need to be provided in the core to remove non-linear effects.


Toroid cores: Toroidal inductors have donut shaped cores with close packed wire winding. Very thin sheets of ferrite or steel are held closely together. Circular cross sections are the most efficient but square or rectangular sections are also used. Common types are Ferrite Toroid Cores and Powdered Iron Toroid Cores.



Page 375


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 376

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS DC MOTOR/GENERATOR (DCAM 3.12 L2)

3.12 DC MOTOR / GENERATOR THEORY (EASA Ref 3.12) Level 2

3.12.1 Basic Generator Theory

i a r T

g n i n

When a conductor ‘cuts’ a magnetic field an emf is induced into the conductor. Figure 183 shows a single coil which can be rotated between a magnetic field, the ends of the coil are connected to slip rings, brushes bearing on the slip rings make the connection to the external circuit (load)




Page 377



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 183: Generator Principle



Page 378


Figure 184 shows a section of the loop as it is rotated through 360° and the output waveform generated. The emf induced at 2, 3 and 4 is opposite to that at 6, 7 and 8 i.e. this is an alternating emf and is therefore the basis of an ac generator.

The magnitude of the emf generated depends on

B = Flux Density in Tesla l = length of the conductors in the field in meter


v = Velocity (speed) of the conductors in m/sec E = Blv Volts

i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 184: Production of a Sine Wave



Page 379


The direction of the induced emf can be found using Fleming’s Right Hand Rule. Figure 185 shows the thumb and first two fingers of the right hand held mutually at right angles to each other.

First Finger

- direction of magnetic field (N to S)

Second Finger - direction of current (conventional) Thumb

- direction of conductor movement


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 185: Fleming’s Right Hand Rule



Page 380


3.12.1.1 Basic DC Generator

Refer Figure 186


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 186: A Simple DC Generator



Page 381


3.12.1.2 Principle of DC Generator

Figure 187 (a) shows the two segments of the commutator approaching the point of maximum induced emf with the current flowing in the

g n i n

load. Figure 187 (b) shows the segments approaching the point of zero emf and approaching the brushes at the point of change over from one commentator segment to the next. Figure 187 (c) shows the changeover has occurred and the lower brush is now in contact with segment 1 not to segment 2 as it was prior to changeover.


i a r T

Conductor 1 (connected to segment 1) is now cutting the field in the opposite direction, so its emf is reversed to be the same as previously induced in conductor 2. The current through the load remains the same in the same direction. The commutator ensures that whichever conductor is passing the N pole is always connected to the negative end of the load and the conductor passing the S pole is connected to the positive end of the load.

FIGURE 187: Principle of DC Generator



Page 382


Figure 188 shows the action of the commutator, note the changeover of the brush contact from one segment to another occurs at the induced emf is zero i.e. at (a) and (c). Rotation is from ( a ) to ( b ) to ( c ) to ( d ) to ( a ) etc.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 188: Action of the Commutator



Page 383


Figure 189 shows a graph of the output from a simple DC generator


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 189: Graph of Voltage and Current for a two segment DC Generator



Page 384


Figure 190 shows the effect of rotating many coils in a magnetic field


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 190: Multi segment DC Generator



Page 385


3.12.2 Construction and Components in a DC Generator

Generators used on aircraft may differ somewhat in design since they are made by various manufacturers. All however are of the same

g n i n

general construction and operate similarly. The major parts or assemblies of a DC Generator are a field frame (yoke), a rotating armature, and a brush assembly. The parts of a typical aircraft generator are shown in Figure 191


i a r T

Figure 191: A typical aircraft Generator



Page 386


Field Frame

The field frame is also called yoke, which is the foundation or frame for the generator. The frame has two functions: it completes the magnetic circuit between the poles and acts as a mechanical support for the other part of the generator.

i a r T

g n i n

In small generators, the frame is made of one piece of iron, but in large generators, it is usually made up of two parts bolted together. The frame has high magnetic properties and, together with the pole pieces, forms the major part of the magnetic circuit.

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M FIGURE 192: A four-pole frame



Page 387


Armature

The rotating part of the generator consists of a shaft, iron core, the output windings (rotating loops or coils) and the commutator. The iron core

g n i n

provides a low reluctance path between the field pole pieces, giving increased flux density, ensuring that the largest emf possible is induced in the output windings. The core is laminated to reduce electromagnetic eddy currents. The output windings are wound in longitudinal slots in the

i a r T

iron core, where they are wedged with insulating material to prevent them being thrown out due to centrifugal force.


The output voltage and maximum current that may be taken from a generator will depend to some extent on the method in which the coils of the armature are connected to one another. There are two types in use, lap and wave windings. In a wave wound generator there are two paths in parallel irrespective of the number of poles, each supplying half the total current output. Therefore only two brushes are required to pick off the output. Wave wound generators produce a high voltage, low current output. While lap wound generators produce a low voltage but high current output. Refer Figure 192

FIGURE 192: The Armature



Page 388


Commutator

This is located at the non-drive end of the armature. It consists of a number of copper segments mounted on, but insulated from, the shaft.

g n i n

They are insulated from one another by strips of mica, which are usually 'undercut' to make their top surface slightly below the level of the commutator segments.

Bushes and Brush Holders


i a r T

The brush must be made of a material which has a low contact resistance, low specific resistance, low coefficient of friction and good

lubricating properties - graphite carbon has these properties. Some machines may have carbon brushes into which a lubricating ingredient (molybdenum disulphide) has been added usually in the form of inserts (pegs) in the brushes. Other machines may have chemicals such as barium fluoride added to form a film (darkish brown) on the commutator to provide the lubrication between the brush and commutator.

The brush holders are in effect metal boxes into which the brush is a good sliding fit, the necessary pressure being applied on the top of the brush by a spring to maintain good contact between brush and commutator. Each brush holder is secured to a support ring sometimes called a brush rocker; this allows limited angular movement of the brush-gear – allowing best contact with the commutator. Electrical connection to the brush holder is via a "pigtail" usually of flexible copper braid moulded into the brush at manufacture, the brush holder then connects to the main terminals of the generator.



Page 389


Field System

Except for very small machines the magnetic field is supplied by electromagnets arranged in such a way that the conductors pass under

g n i n

North and south poles alternately; the number of poles is therefore always an even number. The intense magnetic field through which the conductors pass is achieved by winding the magnet coils on cores of high permeability material ensuring the magnetic circuit has a low reluctance.


i a r T

The YOKE is the cylindrical frame of the machine and is an essential part of the magnetic circuit and must combine low reluctance with structural strength. It is normally of cast or rolled steel.

The POLE PIECES form the cores of magnet coils and are bolted to the inside of the yoke. The pole pieces are laminated. The varying magnetic field caused by movement of the rotor induces emfs into the pole faces which produce eddy currents lamination reduces eddy currents and therefore local heating is minimized by laminating the pole pieces or in some cases just the pole tips. The FIELD WINDINGS are pre-formed coils mounted on the pole pieces and, when current passes through, the polarity of the main poles is alternately north and south.



Page 390


Bearings

The rotating armature is supported in ball or roller bearings. Normally a ball bearing is fitted at the drive end with a roller at the 'tail' end, this permits longitudinal expansion of the shaft. Bearings are lubricated with high melting point grease or lubricating oil.

i a r T

g n i n

The ability to dissipate heat is one of the most important factors which limit the output of a generator. Heat is developed in the steel or iron of the magnetic system due to flux changes and at the commutator and brush gear due to current flow. Cooling air is provided which may be ram


air from the air-flow via ducting to the generator or by an integral fan or a combination of both.

The generator drive system must have some method of disconnecting the generator in the event of seizure of the generator armature, so between the generator and the gearbox will be a quill drive or wasted drive section This drive shaft has a smaller diameter section between the spline drives which will act as a weak spot and shear should excessive torque be applied, e.g. if the generator armature seizes.



Page 391


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 392


3.12.2.1 Commutation

We are going to look at the effect of commutation in coil (1) in Figure 194. Prior to commutation the coil carries half the total armature current in one direction (diagram a).

g n i n

At the point of commutation, i.e. brush shorting the coil, the current collapses, this collapsing current produces a changing field which cuts the

i a r T

coil and induces an emf (diagram b). As the coil leaves this shorted condition, (coil cutting flux in the other direction), the current should build up to half total armature current in the reverse direction.


However this build up is opposed by the self induced emf (REACTANCE VOLTAGE) in the coil and current cannot build up fully so some of it will go up to segment B and jump across the segment to the brush (diagram c).



Page 393


f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M FIGURE 194: Commutation


i a r T

g n i n


Page 394


This REACTIVE SPARKING occurs at each point of commutation for every coil. This will cause brush wear, commutator wear and considerable interference to the radio systems. One method of overcoming this problem is to use INTERPOLES (.Figure 195) Interpoles are

g n i n

small poles located midway between the main poles, the interpole windings are connected in series with the armature and the interpole has the same polarity as the next main pole ahead in the direction of rotation.

i a r T

The poles are at the point of commutation and carry exactly the same current as the armature windings. As the armature coils approach the


point of commutation they come under the influence of the interpole which, attempts to induce an emf into them which is in opposition to the emf already across the coil. The two opposite fluxes cancel, leaving no flux to collapse and no reactance voltage and therefore no reactive sparking.



Page 395



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 195: Interpoles



Page 396


3.12.2.2 Armature Reaction

The main field of a DC generator is between the pole pieces as shown in Figure 196 (a). When the generator is supplying load, a magnetic

g n i n

field is created by current flowing in the armature windings (b). The interaction of these two fields causes a resultant field which is distorted and weakened to an extent dependent on the load (c). This interaction and resultant distortion of the main field is called ARMATURE REACTION.


i a r T

A line drawn vertically at a point midway between the poles is termed the Geometric Neutral Axis (GNA). A line joining the two points at which no emf is induced in a coil is known as the Magnetic Neutral Axis (MNA).Ideally the MNA should be on the GNA.

As shown, armature reaction has caused the MNA to move in front of the GNA, and as the load varies so would the MNA, so brush position would have to be continually adjusted, or if left as it was considerable arcing would take place. Another problem with armature reaction, as shown in (c), is that the flux density at pole tip A is increased and that at pole tips B is reduced. As most machines have a magnetic circuit working near saturation the overall effect is to reduce the magnetic field strength and a reduction in generated emf.

To overcome this problem COMPENSATING WINDINGS are used. These are windings let into slots in the pole faces lying parallel with the armature windings. Refer Figure 196



Page 397


If the current is made to flow through the compensating windings in the opposite direction, and of the same value as the armature windings then the two magnetic fields will neutralize each other and armature reaction will not exist. As the armature reaction is dependent on the value of the load current then the compensating windings must vary with load current and are therefore in series with the armature.

g n i n

To obtain true correction of armature reaction the interpoles may be wound with an extra number of turns to effectively eliminate the armature

i a r T

reaction in the interpole region. So the GNA and MNA coincide at all times. When the generator is a wide speed range (2850rpm to l0,000rpm) generator, the effects due to armature reaction and reactive sparking become more of a problem.

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M FIGURE 196: Compensating Winding



Page 398


3.12.3 Types of DC Generators

Generally, there are 3 types of DC generators known:

1. Series-wound DC generators 2. shunt-wound DC generators 3. shunt-series (or: compound) DC generators.


The various types mainly differ in the relationship of the field winding to the external circuit. 3.12.3.1 Series –wound DC Generator

i a r T

g n i n

The field winding of a series-wound generator is connected in series to the external circuit (called: the load). The field coils are composed of a few turns of large wire. The strength of the magnetic field depends more on the current flow rather than on the number of turns in the coil. Series-wound generators have very poor voltage-regulation capabilities under changing load, since the greater the current through the field coils to the external circuit, the greater will be the induced electromotive force and the greater the terminal (or: output) voltage. Therefore, when the load increases, the voltage increases as well; likewise, when the load decreases, the voltage decreases. Refer Figure 198

The output voltage of a series-wound generator may be controlled by a rheostat in parallel with the field windings, as shown in Figure 197, detail a). Due to the poor regulation capabilities series-wound generators are not installed in aircraft



Page 399



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 197: Series-wound Generator, Schematic Diagram

FIGURE 198: Graph of Voltage against Load Current for Series wound DC Generator



Page 400


3.12.3.2 Shunt-wound DC Generator

A generator having a field winding connected in parallel to the external circuit is called a 'shunt-wound generator'. The field coils of such a

g n i n

generator contain many turns of small wire. The magnetic strength is derived from the large number of turns rather than from the current strength through the coils. When the armature is rotated, the conductors cut the weak magnetic flux due to the residual magnetism in the pole

i a r T

pieces. This small emf induced in the armature windings will supply the field windings, increasing the flux and therefore the induced emf, which again is fed to the field winding increasing the flux and generated emf further. Refer to Figure 199


This continues until a steady open circuit value is reached. When the load is applied the terminal voltage tends to fall due to IR drop in the armature winding, this reduces field excitation and causes a further fall in terminal voltage. This reduction in voltage will be small over the working range of the generator, but as the volts/ load characteristic shows it becomes greater the heavier the load demand. An important point to note is that if the load is increased above the full load condition then, the voltage drops to zero. The falling voltage has to supply current to the field (HIGH RESISTANCE) and load (LOW RESISTANCE). As more current is diverted to the load, the field strength falls, voltage falls and the collapsing voltage can no longer sustain the load current and the voltage falls to zero.

This feature on the volts / load characteristic is known as ‘tuck under ‘or ‘turn under ‘Refer Figure 200. Shunt wound generator should be allowed to build up to their correct voltage before the load is applied otherwise ‘turn under ‘ will occur and the generator will fail to excite.

This type of generator is the one most used on aircraft with DC as its main power source. The slight drop in generator voltage on load is overcome with the use of a voltage regulator.



Page 401



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 199: Shunt-wound Generator, Schematic Diagram

FIGURE 200: Graph of Voltage against Load Current in a Shunt-wound DC Generator



Page 402


3.12.3.3 Compound wound Generator

A compound-wound (or: shunt-series) generator combines a series winding and a shunt winding in such a way that in the result the

g n i n

advantages of both are added. The series-field coils are made of a relatively small number of turns of large copper conductor, either circular or rectangular in cross-section. They are connected in series with the armature circuit. These coils are mounted to the same poles on which the

i a r T

shunt-field coils are mounted. Therefore they produce a magneto-motive force which influences the main field flux of the generator. Refer Figure 201


If the ampere-turns of the series field act into the same direction as those of the shunt field, the combined magnet motive force is equal to the sum of the series and the shunt-field components. Load is added to a compound generator in the same way as to a shunt generator, i.e., by increasing the number of parallel paths across the generator terminals. Thus, the decrease in total-load resistance with added load is accompanied by an increase in armature-circuit and series-field circuit current.

The effect of the additive series field is that the field flux increases with increasing load. The extent of the increased field flux depends on the degree of saturation of the field as determined by the shunt-field current. Thus, the terminal voltage of the generator may increase or decrease with load, depending on the influence of the series-field coils. This influence is called 'degree of compounding'. Changes in terminal voltage with increasing load depend upon the degree of compounding.

In a so-called flat-compound generator the 'no-load' and 'full-load' voltages are of the same value. In an under-compound generator the 'fullload' voltage is less than the 'no-load' value. In an over-compound generator the 'full-load' voltage is higher than the 'no-load' value. If the series field supplements the shunt field, the generator is said to be cumulative compounded (shown in Figure 201, detail b). For Training Purposes Only


Page 403


If the series field opposes the shunt field, the generator is said to be 'differentially compounded' or may be called a 'differential generator'.

Compound-wound generators are usually designed to be over-compounded, i.e. varying degrees of compounding are possible by connecting a variable shunt across the series field. Such a shunt is sometimes called a 'diverter'. Compound-wound generators are used where voltage regulation is of primary importance.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 201: Compound-wound Generator, Schematic Diagram



Page 404


3.12.3.4 Generator Ratings and Terms

Power Output

g n i n

Generators are rated in power output. Since a generator is designed to operate at a specified voltage, the rating is usually given as the

i a r T

number of amperes the generator can safely supply at its rated voltage. Generator rating and performance data are stamped on the name plate attached to the generator. When replacing a generator, it is important to install a new one with the correct rating.


Direction of Rotation

The rotation of generators is termed 'clockwise' or 'counter clockwise', as seen from the driven end. Usually, the direction of rotation is stamped on the data plate. If no direction is stamped on the plate the rotation may be marked by an arrow on the cover plate of the brush housing. It is important to always install a generator with the correct direction of rotation; otherwise the polarity will be reversed.



Page 405


Speed of Rotation

The speed of an aircraft's engine varies from idle revolutions per minute (rpm) to take-off rpm. However, during the major portion of a flight, it

g n i n

turns at a constant speed. The generator drive is usually geared to revolve the generator at a speed between 1.125 and 1.5 times of the engine's crankshaft speed. Most aircraft generators begin to produce their normal voltage at approx. 1,500 rpm. This speed is called the 'coming-in' speed.


i a r T


Page 406


Generator Terminals

On most large 24-V generators, the electrical connections to terminals are marked B, A and E. The positive armature lead in the generator

g n i n

connects to the B terminal. The negative armature lead connects to the E terminal. The positive end of the shunt-field winding connects to terminal A, and the opposite end connects to the negative terminal brush.

i a r T

Terminal A receives current from the negative generator brush through the shunt-field winding. This current passes through the voltage


regulator and back to the armature through the positive brush. Load current leaving the armature through the negative brush and via the E lead passes through the load before returning through the positive brush. Refer to Figure 202



Page 407



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 202: Regulation of Generator Voltage by Field Rheostat



Page 408


3.12.4 Basic Motor Theory

A current carrying conductor has a magnetic field surrounding it. With the conventional current flowing away from the reader the field will be

g n i n

clockwise- this is known as the corkscrew rule, Figure 203. With the current flowing towards the reader the field will be anticlockwise

When considering the magnetic field between the two poles pieces of a bar magnet with opposite polarity the field moves from north to south


i a r T


Page 409



FIGURE 203: Magnetic Field around a Conductor

i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 204: Magnetic Fields between two opposite Poles of a Magnet



Page 410


Refer Figure 205

g n i n

When the current carrying conductor is placed within the magnetic field, the two fields cannot exist independently (conductor and poles)

Above the conductor, flux lines move in the same direction to cause a strong field above the conductor, the fields oppose each other below the conductor and therefore are weak.


i a r T

Magnetic lines of flux above the conductor are in tension and try to straighten, they also repel each other sideways so a force is created forcing the conductor out of the magnetic field – in this case down. This is the principle of an electric motor



Page 411



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 205: Current carrying conductor in a Magnetic Field

The force on the conductor, F = B l I Newton’s

Where

B = Flux Density in Tesla

l = length of conductor in Meters

I = current flowing in the conductor in Amperes



Page 412


3.12.4.1 Fleming’s Left Hand Rule

Refer Figure 206

Using the rule, it is possible to determine the direction of the current, force or field knowing any two of them.

The thumb, first finger and second of the left hand are placed mutually at right angles.


First finger

- the Field direction (N to S)

Second finger -

the Current direction

Thumb

the direction of Motion as a result of a force

.

-


i a r T

g n i n


Page 413



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 206: Fleming's Left Hand Rule



Page 414


3.12.4.2 Action of a Basic Electric Motor

g n i n

Consider a coil connected via a commutator and brushes to a battery as shown in figure 207. Using Fleming's Left Hand Rule side A tends to move upwards and side B downwards, giving a clockwise rotation of the loop.


i a r T

FIGURE 207: A Simple DC Motor



Page 415


3.12.5 A Practical DC Motor

The construction of a dc motor is identical to that of a dc generator. However,the motor converts the electrical input into mechanical energy.

g n i n

When a current flows through the large number of conductors on the armature, their fields interact with the main field system to give a turning motion, with the commutator switching the supply at the point of commutation.

3.12.5.1 Back emf


i a r T

As the armature conductors of a motor rotate in a magnetic field, they are therefore cutting this field and by Faraday's Law an emf will be induced. By Lenz's Law this induced emf opposes the applied voltage and is called a BACK EMF. We have back emf (Es) pushing one way and applied voltage (V) the other way, so it is the difference between these two which actually drives current through the armature circuit and this difference may be known as the EFFECTIVE VOLTAGE or ARMATURE VOLTAGE.

For example, if the applied voltage is 28 volts dc and the back emf is 26 volts then the effective voltage is 2 volts.

EFFECTIVE VOLTS = APPLIED VOLTAGE - BACK EMF IA RA


=

V – EB


Page 416


Assuming a 28 volt motor has a one ohm armature resistance then the initial current flow is: V

28

IA = - =

1

= 28 A

R

g n i n

When the motor is running the back emf is 26V, so the voltage that is available to drive current through the armature circuit is 2 volts.

IA = 2/1 = 2A


i a r T

It is important you realise how back emf controls the current in a dc motor, and when the motor is running the back emf is very close to the value of the applied voltage. On some earlier aircraft electrical starting systems, a resistance was introduced in series with the armature on start, as the initial current would be too high (no back emf), but as the motor gathered speed the resistance was cut out, because the back emf limited the current.

On most motors the starting current is not excessive and temporary in line resistances are not required.



Page 417


3.12.5.2 Torque

It can be shown that the force on each armature conductor and therefore the total ARMATURE TORQUE is directly proportional to the magnetic field strength and armature current.

T

x I a (N-m)


i a r T

g n i n

The whole of the armature torque is not available for doing useful work. Friction in the bearings, wind resistance of the armature or fan (if fitted) causes some lost torque. So the output torque of a motor is:

OUTPUT TORQUE (SHAFT TORQUE) = ARMATURE TORQUE - LOST TORQUE

The torque loss will vary with speed.



Page 418


3.12.5.3 Power

The output power of a motor has two variables in its formula, torque and speed. P

T x N. Therefore for a given power any increase in speed

g n i n

can only be attained at the expense of torque and vice versa. A motor developing a given horsepower thus has alternative values of speed and torque (ie it has a strong torque at low speed or low torque at high speed). If it is necessary to maintain the same speed with increased torque, then the motor must develop increased power.


i a r T

When a motor is run on no-load it speeds up until its torque balances the opposing torque of windage and friction and its speed will be a

maximum.When a mechanical load is placed on the drive shaft the motor will slow down until once again its torque balances the load torque.

3.12.5.4 Reactive Sparking and Armature Reaction

Armature reaction takes place in a motor for the same reasons as in a generator ie the main field is distorted by the armature field. However, with reference to figure 208, note that the MNA moves backwards against the direction of fotation. Since back emf reduces armature current to a fairly small figure, armature reaction is usually fairly small and many dc motors do not have any means of counteracting it.

In some motors, where a high standard of commutation is required compensating windings are fitted. As we saw with generators, interpoles may be used to help control armature reaction, generally only large motors (high armature current) would be equipped with interpoles.



Page 419


Reactive sparking also occurs in motors. Collapse of current flowing into the coil at commutation, induces an emf trying to keep it in the original direction and opposing build up in the reverse direction. Again back emf will keep the reactance emf down so some motors will not be fitted with interpoles, however on larger motors interpoles would be fitted to provide correction for reactive sparking. The polarity being the opposite to the next main pole ahead in the direction of rotation.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 208: Armature Reaction in a DC Motor



Page 420


3.12.5.5 Speed control of a DC motor

The effect of the back emf is to make the dc motor a self regulating machine in which the speed and the armature current adjust themselves to changing load condition.

i a r T

g n i n

Speed control may be obtained by controlling field current or armature current, i.e. by inserting variable resistors in the field or armature circuits. Figure 209



Page 421



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 209: Speed Control of a Shunt wound DC Motor



Page 422


3.12.5.6 Reversal of Rotation of a DC Motor

To reverse the direction of a motor the direction of current through the armature OR through the field must be reversed. If the current through Armature and field are both reversed the motor continues in the same direction.

i a r T

g n i n

To reverse the direction of rotation in a compound motor the same principle applies, that is to reverse the direction of current through the armature OR both fields. On aircraft it is normal to reverse the direction of current through the armature by means of reversing relays.


An alternative method used to reverse the direction of a motor is to use two fields both wound on the same pole pieces but with one giving opposite polarity to the other. Direction of rotation being determined by which field is selected.



Page 423


3.12.6 Types of DC Motors

Like generators, motors are classified according to the way the field system is connected to the armature, i.e.

Series Shunt Compound


i a r T

g n i n

For motors we use two characteristics to show the properties of the machine, the speed/ load characteristic and the torque/load characteristic.



Page 424


3.12.6.1 Series Motor

Previously we said that torque

x Ia

In a series motor as the field ( ) is connected in series with the armature then the

g n i n

Ia, as armature current is field current. So the TORQUE

Ia X Ia = 1a2


i a r T

As can be seen from the characteristics graph the motor has a wide speed range, large starting torque, and high torque at low speed - ideal characteristics for starting an aircraft engine.

The motor must be connected to a load permanently as the off-load speed will be dangerously high. As the field and armature turns are different when speed increases, back emf rises and opposes armature current. This causes the field to be weakened which reduces the back emf disproportionately and it cannot build up sufficiently to control the rise in speed, therefore speed increases and the sequence continues causing excessive speed of the armature.

It should be noted on engine starter motors a small shunt winding is incorporated to limit this off load speed as the starter is disconnected from the engine. Small series motors are used in dc actuators on aircraft which, of course, are permanently on-load.



Page 425



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 210: Series Motor Characteristics



Page 426


3.12.6.2 Shunt Motor

The field winding of a shunt motor is connected in parallel with the armature and is of fairly high resistance. This connection, as can be seen

g n i n

by the characteristics shown in figure 211, produces different properties. The speed characteristic shows that from no-load to full-load the speed reduction is very small and it can be considered to be a constant speed machine.

i a r T

It is a self regulating machine in that when a new load is placed on the motor, the motor automatically adjusts its own effective voltage. The


following shows what happens when the load is increased: •

motor initially slows down

•

the back emf falls

•

armature or 'effective' voltage increases

•

VSUPPLY - Vb emf

•

armature current increases

•

T

•

torque increases to match the new load torque and increase the speed to its original value

x IA

As the field is directly across the supply the field strength is practically constant. This means that the torque of a shunt motor is proportional to armature current until approaching full load condition. The starting torque is small, due to slow build up of the field strength and the restricted armature current.



Page 427


Shunt motors should therefore be started on light load or under no-load conditions. These motors would be used on applications that require constant speed, e.g. early 28v dc aircraft, inverter drives, windscreen wipers and fuel pumps.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 211: Shunt Motor Characteristics



Page 428


3.12.6.3 Compound Wound Motor

This motor has two windings wound on the pole pieces and the characteristics depend on whether the shunt or series predominates and whether they are wound to assist one another (cumulative) or to oppose one another (differential).

Cumulative Compound Motor


i a r T

g n i n

The most common application of the compound motor on aircraft is the cumulative compound machine with a predominant shunt field winding. The series winding enables a fairly high starting torque to be developed, allowing the motor to be started on reasonable load. The characteristic graph shows that the motor speed drops on load, this is due to the series field increasing with increasing armature current. This is an ideal characteristic for a motor supplying a load where the load torque is· proportional to speed, since the motor is virtually a constant torque machine .

This form of cumulative compound motor may be called a normal compound motor, and would be used on dc systems for inverter drives, and dc aircraft for fuel pumps as well as heavy duty actuators. Another form of cumulative compound motor is the 'shunt limited' type. This has all the characteristics of the series motor and therefore the main winding of the series motor with a minor shunt field connected across the armature.

When used to start aircraft engines, high torque at low speed is required, but when the motor is disconnected from the engine, i.e. on no load, a pure series motor would race away. The minor shunt winding limits this 'off load' speed while leaving the torque / speed characteristics essentially that of a series motor. For Training Purposes Only


Page 429


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 430


Differential Compound Motor

This is where the shunt and series field windings are wound to oppose one another. These tend to be mainly shunt wound machines with a

g n i n

minor series winding, which gives a speed/load characteristic which is fairly constant but increases speed as the load becomes too great. The torque on light loads is similar to a shunt motor as the characteristic graph shows, but if overloaded the series winding field strength will at some point cancel the shunt winding.


i a r T

There will be no torque the motor will stop even though taking excessive current. So it is important this motor is not overloaded. It also has a problem on starting. The series field (low inductance) builds up before the shunt field and the motor starts in the reverse direction, this is usually avoided by short circuiting the series winding on start.



Page 431



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 212: Compound Motor Characteristics



Page 432


3.12.7 Starter Generator

These are used on aircraft and offer a considerable weight saving over the system which has a starter motor and a generator. For starting

g n i n

purposes the starter generator is supplied a dc current Once the engine has started the motor becomes a generator and supplies current the other way to operate systems and charge batteries etc.

i a r T

Typically it is a self excited compound wound machine which has compensating windings and interpole windings with an integral cooling fan


on the drive shaft. It is also cooled by ram air when the aircraft is airborne.

Located on the stator is a speed sensor, used to signal starter cut-off. It generally starts as a compound motor and then the shunt field is weakened to allow it to become more of a series motor and therefore give the necessary torque and acceleration to the engine. Nearing self sustaining speed the shunt field is brought fully back in.

At changeover the starter drive is disconnected and the driven machine now becomes a generator self exciting its own shunt field and when the voltage is sufficient it will be connected to the bus-bar.



Page 433



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 213: Starter Generator Circuit



Page 434

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS AC THEORY (DCAM 3.13 L1)

13 AC THEORY 3.13.1 Fundamentals

g n i n

An electric current has been seen to be the drift of electric charge around a circuit in one direction. Such as current is called a ’direct current’,

i a r T

such circuits are called ’direct current circuits’, or ’DC circuits’. There is however, widespread use of circuits in which the electric current is not unidirectional, but is continually reversing. In these circuits in which the electric charge starts to move in one direction, then stops and restarts


to move in the opposite direction, only to stop and reverse.

Since the current flows in alternate directions, it is known as an ’alternating current’, and such currents are called ’alternating current circuits’ or simply ’AC circuits’.

3.13.2 AC Generation

Figure 214 shows the physical arrangement of a loop arranged to rotate in a magnetic field. The connections to the end of the loop, or coil, have been made by sliding contacts known as ’slip rings’, so that any one terminal is always connected to the same side of the loop.



Page 435



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 214: Loop in a Magnetic Field



Page 436


Figure 215 shows a part of the loop at the instant when it has turned through an angle

(Theta) from the reference point shown, midway

between the magnetic poles. The instantaneous velocity (V) of the loop, which will be tangential to the circle described by the rotating loop, may be considered to have two components at right angles.

g n i n

From the geometry it follows that the component of this velocity at right angles to the direction of the magnetic field is V x sin , while the

i a r T

component of velocity parallel to the magnetic field is V x cos . The speed with which the loop cuts across the magnetic field will be V x sin


and this speed will determine the EMF induced in the loop at the instant considered.

The component of velocity V x cos , parallel to the magnetic field does not contribute to the ’cutting’ of any lines of magnetic flux.



Page 437



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 215: EMF Generation



Page 438


3.13.3 Waveform and Instantaneous Value

The loop as shown in Figure 216 is rotating at a constant speed, therefore its tangential velocity is always the same. It is the component of

g n i n

this velocity which cuts across the magnetic field that determines the rate at which the loop cuts the magnetic flux and so determines the value of induced EMF. It is this component of the loop velocity across the magnetic field that varies from instant to instant.


i a r T


Page 439



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 216: Flux Cut by a Loop in a Magnetic Field



Page 440


The magnetic field between the poles is represented by a number of equal spaced parallel lines of force, and the loop is in various positions as it moves round. Since the loop is assumed to be moving at a constant speed, and each point, shown numbered, represents 150 movements from the next point. The time taken for the loop to move from one point to the next will be the same in each case. The number of

g n i n

lines of force ’cut’ by the loop in moving one point to the next, which represents the flux cut by the loop in the time taken, will then represent the rate of cutting of flux; that is, the average EMF induced during this time.


As the loop moves from:

1 to 2, it cuts 0 lines, 2 to 3, it cuts 9 lines,

3 to 4, it cuts 18 lines,

i a r T

4 to 5, it cuts 26 lines, 5 to 6, it cuts 32 lines, 6 to 7, it cuts 35 lines, 7 to 8, it cuts 37 lines, 8 to 9, it cuts 35 lines.

The time interval for each movement is the same and the flux cut during each movement in this time increases up to a maximum as the average position of the loop reaches a point under the pole (7 to 8, 37 lines). The values of flux cut in equal times, are proportional to the EMF induced in the loop.



Page 441


This can be plotted against average loop position in degrees. The instantaneous EMF (u) induced in the loop, i.e. the EMF at any point in the 360o rotation of the loop is given by the formula: u = EMFmax x sin

g n i n

When the loop has been round one revolution from any instantaneous position considered, it will be back again in the same position relative to the magnetic field. It will have the same instantaneous velocity across the magnetic field, and so it will have induced in it at that instant, the

i a r T

same EMF as when it was there before. This type of wave variation is known as SINUSOIDAL, so that the EMF induced in the loop is named


’sinusoidal’ alternating EMF. Refer Figure 217

FIGURE 217: Lines Cut against Loop Position



Page 442


Figure 218 shows the instantaneous loop EMF against values of the angle , for three complete revolutions of the loop. In this diagram the scale for the angular position of the loop, as measured by the angle , goes beyond 360o. Each complete 360o represents one complete revolution, so that 1.25 revolutions from zero is represented by an angle of 1.25 x 360o = 450o.

g n i n

Alternating wave--forms other than sinusoidal wave-forms may be encountered in practice. However the sinusoidal wave-form has many

i a r T

advantages over all other kinds for supply purposes, and a great deal of effort is made in electric supply systems to ensure a pure sinusoidal


wave-form for alternating voltages and currents.



Page 443



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 218: EMF against Loop Position



Page 444


3.13.4 Sine Wave Characteristics 3.13.4.1 Peak Value

g n i n

Figure 219 shows peak values that occur during an AC sine wave. Two peaks occur during one complete revolution of 3600. One peak occurs during the positive part of the wave when its maximum height is reached.


i a r T

This point represents the maximum positive value that occurs during the AC sine wave. A second peak value occurs during the negative part of the wave, when the maximum height below the zero line is reached. This point is known as the negative peak value.



Page 445



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 219: Peak Value of a Sinusoidal Wave



Page 446


3.13.4.2 Peak--to--Peak Value

Figure 220 shows the peak--to--peak value of a sinusoidal wave. This value is measured between the point of maximum positive swing and the point of maximum negative swing. The peak--to--peak value is therefore twice the peak value.


i a r T

g n i n


Page 447



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 220: Peak to Peak Value of a Sinusoidal Wave



Page 448


3.13.4.3 Root Mean Square Value

When a direct current flows through a resistor, a certain amount of power is dissipated by the resistor in a form of heat. A certain amount of

g n i n

heat is also generated if an alternating current is allowed to flow through the same resistor. However, the heat generated by a DC of one ampere will generate more heat than an AC current with a peak value of one ampere. The alternating current generates less heat because it reaches its peak value of one ampere only once during each half wave.


i a r T

The average value must, therefore, be lower than one ampere. Therefore an AC current with a higher peak value must be used to generate an equivalent amount of heat. An alternating current that will generate the same amount of heat (in a specific resistor) as a direct current that has a value of one ampere is considered to have an effective or rms value of one ampere.

The rate of dissipation of energy as heat in a resistor depends upon the SQUARE of the current or voltage: P = I2 x R or P = U2 R.

Figure 221, (detail a) shows that the square of the sinusoidal current (I2) plotted against the time, generates a curve which is always above the time axis (+ I2 = + I2; − I2 = +I2) and symmetrical about the halfway line. The energy dissipated over any time interval is proportional to the shaded area beneath the curve. If the peaks of the I2 graph are imagined as being cut off half way up, they will fit exactly in the troughs as shown in Figure 221, (detail b). This indicates that the height of the equivalent rectangle is exactly 50 A2 and the equivalent current can be stated more accurately as 7.07 A (I2 = 50 A2, I = 50 A2 ,, I = 7.07 A). This heating effect of an alternating current is very important in AC theory and is the value usually indicated by meters. For Training Purposes Only


Page 449



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 221: Root Mean Square Value (rms)



Page 450


For example, when the statement is made that the alternating voltage available at the consumers supply terminals is 220 V, it is the effective or rms value that is given.

Therefore the peak value is:

Peak value = rms value x 2


The factor 2 is to be seen as a given value. Peak value = 220 V x 2

Peak value = 220 V x 1.414

i a r T

g n i n

Peak value = 311 V

That is, the heating effect resulting from applying this peak voltage across a resistance would be the same as that resulting from an application of a steady DC voltage of 220 V, for the same length of time.

Since the effective value is less than the peak value for a sinusoidal wave-form, a 220 V sinusoidal supply will have instantaneous values greater than 220 V for some parts of the cycle, and will have a peak value just over 311 V. Since it is calculated by finding the square root of the average value of I2 or U2, the effective value is known as the root mean square or rms value.



Page 451


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 452


3.13.4.4 Period and Cycle

When a sinusoidal wave-form is analysed it is often necessary to know how much time is required to generate one complete cycle of the wave-form.

Refer to Figure 222


i a r T

g n i n

The period is normally measured in seconds. Furthermore the period is often represented by the letter ’T’. If a generator generates one cycle of output voltage in one second, the output sine wave has a period (T) of one second. If four cycles are generated in one second, the output sine wave will have a period of one quarter of a second (T = 0.25 seconds).

The period is the time for one cycle, not the total time required to generate any given number of cycles.



Page 453



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 222: Period of a Sinusoidal Wave



Page 454


3.13.4.5 Frequency

Refer to Figure 223

g n i n

Often it is necessary to know how rapidly an AC wave is changed its value. It is important to know how many cycles of the wave occur in a

i a r T

given period of time. The number of cycles that occur in a specified period of time is the ’Frequency’ (f) of the wave.


Each time the armature (loop) of a simple generator completes one revolution, one cycle is generated. Therefore the frequency of an AC wave is determined by the speed at which the armature rotates. As the speed of rotation increases, more cycles are generated in a given period of time, thus causing the frequency to increase. The frequency (f) of a sinusoidal (sine) wave is expressed in terms of the number of cycles generated per second.

For example, an armature (loop) that rotates one complete revolution each second generates one cycle of ac output voltage each second. The AC voltage would therefore have a frequency (f) of one cycle per second. Although the frequency is the number of cycles generated each second, it is expressed in HERTZ (abbreviated Hz).

A generator which generates an AC voltage that completes one cycle per second operates at a frequency (f) of one Hz. The term Hertz is the unit for frequency. If the AC generator generates 30 cycles of AC output voltage each second, it operates at a frequency of 30 Hz. Likewise, an output of 60 cycles per second would be expressed as 60 Hz.



Page 455



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 223: Frequency of a Sinusoidal Wave



Page 456


Refer to Figure 224

There is a definite relationship between the frequency and the period of a sine wave. When the period of a sine wave is equal to one second,

g n i n

the frequency will be equal one Hz. If the period decreases to 0.5 seconds, or one half of its original value, the frequency would double, or increase to 2 Hz. This is because exactly twice as many cycles would occur each second. Similarly if the period were doubled, the frequency would be cut in half.


The relationship between frequency (f) and period (T) is therefore:

f=1/T

i a r T

This equation states that the frequency (f) is equal to one divided by the period (T).

Furthermore, if the period is expressed in seconds, the frequency obtained will be in Hz. For example, when the period of a sine wave is equal to 0.05 seconds, the frequency of the wave will be equal to:

f=1/T

f = 1 / 0.05 s f = 20 Hz.



Page 457


A period of 0.05 seconds therefore corresponds to a frequency of 20 Hz. If the period was cut in half or reduced to 0.025 seconds, the frequency would be:

f=1/T f = 1 / 0.025 s f = 40 Hz.


i a r T

g n i n

The result is that the frequency increases to 40 Hz, or double. The equation shows that f and T are inversely proportional. When one increases the other decreases by a proportional amount and vice versa.

The equation f = 1 / T can also be transposed so that T can be determined when f is known:

T=1/f

For example, when f is 100 Hz, T can be determined as follows:

T=1/f

T = 1 / 100 Hz

T = 0.01 seconds.



Page 458


Frequencies that range from a few Hz to many millions of Hz are widely used in electronics. For example, the 220 V AC electric power that is in common use has a frequency of 50 Hz. This 50 Hz voltage is used to operate lights and appliances. In many electrical applications, the frequencies involved are much higher. These high frequencies are required to carry information or data.


i a r T

g n i n


Page 459



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 224: Period and Frequency



Page 460


Also the higher frequencies are easier to convert into electromagnetic (radio) waves which can be transmitted over long distances. These higher frequencies cannot be generated by AC generator machines, since these devices rotate at a very high speed which would be necessary. Instead they are generated by electronic circuits which do not require moving parts.

g n i n

When frequencies are used that extend up to many millions of Hz, large numbers must be handled. These large numbers can be reduced to manageable size by the use of various metric prefixes:


Prefix Symbol Value

Prefix

Symbol

Value

Kilo

K

1000 (103)

Mega

M

1000000 (106)

Giga

G

1000000000 (109)

i a r T

The prefixes can be placed before a word to change its meaning. For example, the prefix Kilo means 1000 and when it is placed before the unit Hertz, the word ’Kilohertz’ which means 1000 Hz.

General 1000 Hz are expressed simple as 1Kilo--hertz, or the symbol K is used to represent Kilo and the symbol Hz to represent Hertz; the quantity is expressed as 1KHz. For Training Purposes Only


Page 461


In a similar manner the prefix Mega (M) is used to represent 1000000. Therefore 1000000 Hertz can be expressed as 1 Mega—hertz or 1 MHz. The prefix Giga (G) represents 1000000000.

g n i n

Therefore 1000000000 Hertz can be expressed as 1 Giga--hertz or 1 GHz or 1000 MHz. Also a frequency of 10000 Hertz could be expressed as 10KHz.


i a r T


Page 462


Figure 225 shows the frequency band that is most commonly used. The frequencies between 15 Hz and 20 KHz are referred to as audio frequencies. An AC voltage that has a frequency within this range will generate an audible tone to which the human ear will respond.

g n i n

However the AC must be applied to device, such as a loudspeaker, which will convert it into sound waves that can be detected by the human ear. The frequencies between 3 KHz and 300 GHz are referred to as radio frequencies (RF) since they are used extensively in radio communications and radar systems.


The radio frequency band is subdivided into frequency ranges as follows: •

very--low frequency (VLF) – 3 KHz to 30 KHz

•

low frequency (LF) -- 30 KHz to 300 KHz

•

medium frequency (MF) -- 300 KHz to 3 MHz

•

high frequency (HF) -- 3 MHz to 30 MHz

•

very--high frequency (VHF) -- 30 MHz to 300 MHz

•

ultra--high frequency (UHF) -- 300 MHz to 3 GHz

•

super--high frequency (SHF) -- 3 GHz to 30 GHz

•

extremely--high frequency (EHF) -- 30 GHz to 300 GHz.

i a r T

Above the upper limit of 300 GHz other forms of electromagnetic energy such as, light waves, x rays and cosmic rays are encountered.



Page 463



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 225: Frequency Band



Page 464


3.13.4.6 Angular Velocity

g n i n

The relationship between the instantaneous EMF in a sine wave and time is an important consideration in alternating voltage and current circuits. The angle

can be expressed in such a way that the instantaneous value of the EMF is made dependent on time. This angle

i a r T

is

expressed in RADIANS, instead of degrees. A radian is the angle at the centre of a circle subtended by an arc of the circumference equal in length to the radius of the circle. The circumference of a circle contains 360 degrees. It length is 2 times the radius. Thus, the rotation through


360 degrees is the same as rotation through 2 radians. Refer to Figure 226. 3600 = 2 radians 0

180 =

radians

900 =

/ 2 radians

One radian is:

3600 / 2 = 3600 / 6.28 = 57.30.

If one revolution is performed the loop has passed through 3600 or 2 radians. If the loop rotates at f revolutions per second it passes 2 x f radians per second. This is termed ’Angular Velocity’, which is equal to: 2 x f =

(radians per second).

At any interval of t seconds from the commencement of rotation, the loop is rotated through an angle


equal to 2 x f x t (radians)


Page 465


The instant voltage u at this instant is: u = U sin u = U sin

t (volts).

Similar, with an alternating voltage in a circuit, the value of the current at any instant is: i = I sin i = I sin

t (amperes).


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 226: The Radian



Page 466


3.13.4.7 Phase Refer to Figure 227

g n i n

The fractional part of a period through which the time variable of a periodic quantity (alternating electric current, vibration) has moved, as

i a r T

measured at any point in time from an arbitrary time origin. In the case of a sinusoidal varying quantity, the time origin is usually assumed to be the last point at which the quantity passed through a zero position from a negative to a positive direction.


In comparing the phase relationships at a given instant between two time-varying quantities, the phase of one is usually assumed to be zero, and the phase of the other is described, with respect to the first, as the fractional part of a period through which the second quantity must vary to achieve a zero of its own (see illustration). In this case, the fractional part of the period is usually expressed in terms of angular measure, with one period being equal to 360° or 2 radians.



Page 467



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 227: An illustration of the meaning of phase for a sinusoidal wave. The difference in phase between waves 1 and 2 is

and

is called the phase angle. For each wave, A is the amplitude and T is the period.



Page 468


3.13.4.8 Phase Difference

It is often necessary to compare two AC wave--forms of the same frequency and to determine if the two wave--forms coincide, i.e. occur at the

g n i n

same time. In many cases, two AC wave--forms within the same circuit will be displaced in time or by a given number of degrees.

When two alternating quantities of the same frequency pass through corresponding points in a circle at the same time they are ’In Phase’. Figure 228


i a r T

If they pass through the corresponding points in the circle at different instants of time, they are ’Leading or Lagging’ by a certain phase angle. The instantaneous values can be solved by the use of the following equations:

I1 = I Sin wt

I2 = I Sin ( wt – )



Page 469



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 228: Sine Waves in Phase



Page 470


3.13.5 Triangular/Square waves

The fundamental waveform of electrical engineering is the sine wave, generated when a loop rotates in a magnetic field. If a sinusoidal current

g n i n

is passed through a linear resistance, capacitance or inductance, then the voltage developed across the component is also sinusoidal.

i a r T

For any other waveform shape the voltage will differ from the shape of the flown current, if there is some capacitance or inductance in the circuit.


Refer to Figure 229



Page 471



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 229: Typical Wave-Forms



Page 472


Figure 230 shows typical examples of wave--form shapes used in electric circuits. Pulse trains and square waves are used extensively in electronics, because of their fairly precise time at which the voltage levels change, in many timing applications.

g n i n

In a radar system, for example, a pulse is transmitted and the radar receiver picks up any reflection from objects such as ships or aircraft. The time between transmission and reception of the pulse is a measure of the distance away of the object. Pulse generators usually generate a stream of pulses at regular intervals.


Two more quantities must therefore be considered:

i a r T

•

the number of pulses per second, known as pulse repetition frequency (PRF)

•

the ratio of the pulse duration to the time between two pulses, known as mark--to--space ratio.

The pulses in Figure 230 contain a mark--to--space ratio of 1: 4 (mark = 1µs; space = 4µs).

The pulse repetition frequency (PRF) can be determined as follows:

PRF = 1 / PRT



Page 473


Whereby PRT is the time of mark plus the time of space.

PRF = 1 / tmark + tspace PRF = 1 / (1 x 10−6 seconds) + (4 x 10−6 seconds) PRF = 1 / (5 x 10−6 seconds) PRF = 200 kHz.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 230: PRT and Mark to Space Ratio



Page 474


3.13.6 Single/ Three phase principles

The basics of alternating current as described in the previous chapters are related to a so-called ’single phase’ or ’one phase’. However, many

g n i n

ships and other consumers use ’three phase’ electrical power as their primary power. All rules and laws of alternating current are to be used for ’single phase’ and ’three phase’ as well.

i a r T

Figure 231, (detail a) shows the wave--form of a three phase alternating current. Each phase is shifted 1200 by another. The generation of


this wave--form is performed by an arrangement of coils and a rotating magnet as shown in Figure 231, (detail b). 0

Three coils are fitted on a core with a shift of 120 . The rotating magnet with constant speed induces in each coil a sinusoidal voltage originated by cutting of flux lines of the magnet.



Page 475



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 231: Generation of Three Phase Alternating Current



Page 476


Three Phase Y and ∆Configurations Y-Connected

g n i n

The idea o three-phase power systems is by connecting three voltage sources together in what is commonly known as the “Y” (or “star”)

i a r T

configuration. This configuration of voltage sources is characterized by a common connection point joining one side of each source. If we draw


a circuit showing each voltage source to be a coil of wire (alternator or transformer winding) and do some slight rearranging, the “Y” configuration becomes more obvious in Figure 231(B)

The three conductors leading away from the voltage sources (windings) toward a load are typically called lines, while the windings themselves are typically called phases. In a Y-connected system, there may or may not be a neutral wire attached at the junction point in the middle, although it certainly helps alleviate potential problems should one element of a three-phase load fail open.

When we measure voltage and current in three-phase systems, we need to be specific as to where we’re measuring. Line voltage refers to the amount of voltage measured between any two line conductors in a balanced three-phase system. With the above circuit, the line voltage is roughly 208 volts. Phase voltage refers to the voltage measured across any one component shown in Figure 231(D), the phase voltage is 123 volts. The terms line current and phase current follow the same logic, the former referring to current through any one line conductor and the latter to current through any one component.



Page 477


Y-connected sources and loads always have line voltages greater than phase voltage, and line current equal to phase currents. If the Yconnected source or load is balanced, the line voltage will be equal to the phase voltage times the square root of 3 E line = √ 3 E phase I line = I phase


i a r T

g n i n


Page 478


Delta Connected

The “Y” configuration is not only the valid one for connecting three-phase voltage source or load elements together. Another configuration is

g n i n

known as the “Delta”, for its geometric resemblance to the Greek letter of the same name (∆). Take close notice of the polarity for each winding in Figure 231 (E).


i a r T

At first glance it seems as though three voltage sources like this would create a short-circuit, electrons flowing around the triangle with nothing but the internal impedance of the windings to hold them back. Due to the phase angle of these three voltage sources, however, this is not the case.

For Delta circuits:

E line = E phase

I line = √3 I Phase



Page 479



i a r T

g n i n


Page 480

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS RESISTIVE, CAPACITIVE & INDUCTIVE (DCAM 3.14 L2)

3.14 RESISTIVE (R), CAPACITIVE (C) AND INDUCTIVE (L) CIRCUITS (EASA 3.14) LEVEL 2 3.14.1 Introduction

g n i n

We need to look at the effect of ac applied to resistance, inductance and capacitance as the results are important as we shall see.

i a r T

There is no such thing as a 'pure' resistance, a 'pure' inductance or a 'pure' capacitance. A wire wound resistor, for instance, since it is wound in the form of a coil has inductance as well as resistance, similarly, a capacitor has resistance as well as capacitance.


However, for the purposes of the next few pages we are going to assume 'pure' components as it makes the treatment easier and it is helpful to show the 'ideal' conditions.

3.14.1.1 Pure Resistance in AC Circuits

With reference to the graph in Figure 232. It can be seen that the voltage and current are in-phase and the phasor diagram would be as shown below the graph.

Ohms law and the use of rms values applies at all times to a purely resistive circuit.

I=V

V = IR

R


R=V I


Page 481



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 232 :Resistor in AC Circuit



Page 482


3.14.1.2 Power in Pure Resistive Circuits

The power is the average value of all the instantaneous values of power for a complete cycle. To find the instantaneous power at any moment, the instantaneous values of voltage and current at that moment are multiplied together.

i a r T

g n i n

Thus in Figure 233 ( a ) at moment X, the voltage is A volts and the current B amps. The power at this moment is therefore AB watts (V x I)


and is represented by point C on the graph.

If this process is carried out over the complete cycle the power curve is produced as shown in Figure 233 ( b ). The power is always positive because current and voltage are in phase and when voltage and current are positive their product is positive when they are both negative their product is still positive.

The average power over a complete cycle is the average value of the power curve and this is represented by a line halfway between maximum and minimum values of the curve, since the shaded areas above and below the line are equal. The power waveform has twice the frequency of the supply. Therefore in the Figure 233 (c) the power fluctuates rapidly between zero and 12 watts, but over a complete cycle, the average power is 6 watts.

We are only interested in average power as the frequency of the supply is usually high and this is what the device (lamp, electric motor etc) actually consumes.



Page 483



(b)

i a r T

g n i n

(c)

FIGURE 233: Power in Resistive Circuits



Page 484


The average power will from now be referred to as 'power', is half the peak power in a resistive circuit, and this peak value is the maximum voltage multiplied by the maximum current.

Pmax = Vmax x Imax

P average = Vmax x Imax


= Vmax x Imax 2

2

i a r T

g n i n

P = Vrms x Irms watts.

As Vrms = Irms x R

then P = 12rms x R watts

and Irms = Vrms R

then P = V2rms watts R



Page 485


So to sum up. In a resistive circuit:

1) V and I are in phase. 2) Normal ohms law calculations apply. 3) dc calculations apply for power. 4) Power is produced.


i a r T

g n i n


Page 486


3.14.1.3 Pure Inductance in AC Circuits

When an ac supply is connected to an inductance, as the current is continually varying then an emf (back emf) is induced into the coil. Its value is dependent on the value of the inductor in henrys and the rate of change of current (di/dt).

i a r T

g n i n

e = - L di/dt volts. The e = emf, L = inductance in henrys and the minus sign indicates that it opposes the applied voltage.


This back emf opposes the rise of current in the circuit and therefore delays its rise as can be seen by the waveform diagram

in Figure 234 ( b ). In a pure inductive circuit V leads I by 90° or I lags V by 90°. The back-emf in the circuit provides the opposition to current flow. It therefore acts in a similar manner to a resistance in the circuit. It is a form of ac resistance but is called REACTANCE, it is given in ohms and has the symbol X, to identify it as reactance in an inductive circuit the symbol is XL is used.

The inductive reactance of a coil depends upon the rate of change of current (which is dependent on frequency) and the value of the inductance. It iscalculated by the formula: XL = 2rr fL ohms Where

XL = Inductive reactance. 2 = 6·28 (approx)

f = frequency in Hertz

L = Inductance in henrys For Training Purposes Only


Page 487


As in any circuit the opposition to current flow is always V so in the pure inductive circuit XL = V ohms I

I

It is important for you to determine what happens in a pure inductive circuit when the frequency to a circuit is increased or decreased.


(b)

i a r T

g n i n

(c)

FIGURE 234: Inductor in AC Circuit



Page 488


3.14.1.4 Power in Pure Inductive Circuits

As the voltage and current are 90° out of phase positive and negative powers are produced. In the purely inductive circuit, the total power is

g n i n

zero,since positive and negative powers cancel. Positive power is given to the circuit from the power supply on one half cycle and negative is returned to the supply source on the other half cycle of power.

i a r T

Over a complete cycle the net power is zero. It is important to note that current flows in the circuit but no work is being done when the current


is 90° out of phase with the voltage.

Summary

I lags V by 90° or V leads I by 90°

Opposition to current flow is INDUCTIVE REACTANCE (XL)

XL =2

fL ohms, XL = V ohms I

NO POWER is produced in a purely inductive circuit.



Page 489



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 235: Power in Inductive Circuit



Page 490


3.14.1.5 Pure Capacitance in AC Circuits

Voltage exists across the plates of a capacitor only after the current has flowed to charge the plates. With reference to Figure 236 it can be seen that the current leads the voltage and in a pure capacitive circuit it leads by 90°. Remember, it can also be stated that voltage lags the current.


i a r T

g n i n

A capacitor opposes any change in the value of voltage applied to it and so presents an opposition to current at all times. This opposition is called CAPACITIVE REACTANCE (Xc) and is measured in ohms.

Xc =_1_ ohms 2 fC

Where :

Xc = capacitive reactance in ohms

2 = 6·28 (approx)

f = frequency in Hz

C = Capacitance in Farads For Training Purposes Only


Page 491


Again, this is an important formula to remember. Also as in any circuit the opposition to current flow is V/I . You must be able to work out what happens to the current in a purely capacitive circuit when there is a frequency change.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 236: Capacitor in AC Circuit



Page 492


3.14.1.6 Power in Pure Capacitive Circuits The power curve is produced as previously illustrated in the pure resistive and pure inductive circuits. Looking at Figure 237 (the shaded

g n i n

areas) it can be seen there are two positive peaks and two negative peaks of power over one complete cycle so the net power is zero. SUMMARY


I leads V by 90° or

V lags I by 90°.

i a r T

Opposition to current flow is CAPACITVE REACTANCE

Xc =_l_ohms 2 fc

Xc = V ohms I

NO POWER is produced in a purely capacitive circuit. For Training Purposes Only


Page 493



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 237: Power in Capacitive Circuit



Page 494


3.14.2 Resistor and Inductor in Series

g n i n

The concept of a pure inductor is not a practical one, as an inductor is a length of wire wound into a coil. This then will have resistance which can be represented by a pure inductor in series with a resistor. Figure 238 ( a )

i a r T

The waveform diagram Figure 238 ( b ) shows that voltage and current are out of phase by an angle less than 90° and with current lagging voltage.


(b)

FIGURE 238: Resistor and Inductor in Series



Page 495


To draw a phasor diagram for this circuit everything is drawn from a REFERENCE PHASOR, which in a series circuit is the current as it is the same throughout the circuit. From this current phasor are drawn the voltage phasors. The voltage across the resistor VR is in phase with the current and therefore drawn on the same line. The voltage across the inductor leads the current by 90° and is draw vertically as shown in Figure 239. Remember phasors rotate anti-clockwise.

i a r T

g n i n

To find the supply voltage (V) we cannot just add these voltages together as you would do in a de circuit, because they are out of phase with


one another, so by completing the parallelogram (phasor addition) we can find the supply voltage ( V )

FIGURE 239: Phasor Diagram (RL Series Circuit)

In other words the ratio of the reactance to the resistance is the tangent of the phase angle. The phase angle

= tan- 1 XL

XR



Page 496


Impedance The opposition to current flow in this circuit is provided by the resistance of the resistor and the reactance of the inductor and when there is a combination like this the opposition to current flow is called IMPEDANCE (Z) in ohms.

The opposition to current flow is therefore Z = V ohms

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M I

We know VL = IXL

VR=IR

i a r T

g n i n

V by Pythagoras, V2 = (IXL)2 + (IR)2

V = (IXL)2 + ( IR )2


V/I =

( XL )2 + ( R )2

Z

( XL )2 + ( R )2

=


Page 497



This is known as the impedance triangle and once again

i a r T

g n i n

Tan = XL R

SUMMARY

1. Current lags the voltage or voltage leads the current by some angle between 0 and 90° which depends on values of

L and R

Tan = XL R

2. Opposition to current flow is impedance (Z) ohms Z = (R) 2 + (XL) 2 For Training Purposes Only


Page 498


3.14.3 Resistor and Capacitor in Series

g n i n

The waveform diagram (Figure 240 b) shows the voltage and current are out of phase by less than 90° with current leading the voltage.

i a r T

Once again, to draw the phasor diagram use the current phasor as the reference, VR is in phase with the current so is drawn on top of I. The voltage across the capacitor Vc is lagging the current by 90° and is drawn vertically downwards. The actual supply voltage can again be found


by phasor addition.

The opposition to current flow provided by the capacitive reactance (Xc) and resistance (R) is called impedance (Z) ohms



Page 499



i a r T

g n i n

(b)

FIGURE 240: Resistor and Capacitor in Series

FIGURE 241: Phasor Diagram of Resistor and Capacitor in Series



Page 500



i a r T

g n i n


Page 501


2.


i a r T

g n i n

Opposition to current flows is impedance (Z) ohms

Z = V ohms I



Page 502


The word CIVIL can be used as a convenient way of remembering the relative position of the phase between current and voltage in capacitive and inductive circuits.


i a r T

g n i n


Page 503


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 504


3.14.4 Resistor, Inductor and Capacitor in Series The circuit is shown in figure 242 (a) where resistance, inductance and capacitance are connected in series.

g n i n

The phasor diagram (figure 242 ( b) would be drawn as before i.e. VR in phase, VL 90° ahead and Vc 90° behind. As VL and Vc are 180°

i a r T

apart, in direct opposition it is the difference (VL - Vc in this case) that is used to find V the supply voltage.


Note. In this circuit as VL is greater than Vc then current lags the voltage and is therefore more inductive. The opposition to current flow is again impedance and is:

Z = R2+(X L- XC )2 ohms Or

= V ohms I

And tan

= XL – Xc R



Page 505



i a r T

g n i n

(b)

FIGURE 242: Resistor, Inductor and Capacitor in Series



Page 506


3.14.5 Series Resonance

g n i n

If we have a series circuit consisting of R, Land C, and we can vary the frequency to the circuit we can vary its properties. As the frequency uses the inductive reactance XL (2 fl) rises but the capacitive reactance Xc (_1_) falls. 2 fc


i a r T

At one particular frequency XL = Xc resonance occurs, the frequency at which this happens is called the RESONANT FREQUENCY (fo). The graph in Figure 243 illustrates this

At resonance we need to look at the conditions in the circuit.

XL = XC

Therefore VL = VC

The phasor diagrams are as shown in figure 244.



Page 507



FIGURE 243: Graph of XL and XC and Frequency


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 244: Phasor Diagram of XL and XC


Page 508


If XL = Xc they are 180° apart (antiphase) so they will cancel leaving just the resistance of the circuit so Z = R. If Z = R then the impedance is at a minimum and therefore the current must be at a maximum. Also as VL and Vc are antiphase they also cancel so the applied voltage will equal the voltage across the resistor VR = V. Current will be in phase with the supply voltage and the power factor is 1.


i a r T

g n i n

At resonance, as the current is high the voltages across Land C are equal and opposite so that their resultant is zero. However, when considered alone they can be very high voltages, much greater than the supply and it is this voltage magnification which will be discussed later.

The circuit is very often known as an ACCEPTOR CIRCUIT and the frequency at which resonance occurs can be found by: fo = 1 2 where

LC Hz

fo = resonant frequency in Hz. 2 = 6·28 (approx)

L = Inductance in henrys

C = Capacitance in farads



Page 509



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 245: Graph of Z and I against Frequency



Page 510


Circuit Magnification At resonance we know the voltages across the inductor and capacitor can be very high.

At resonance VL = I XL


Current is a maximum and equal to .V as Z = R at resonance. R

i a r T

g n i n

The ratio of reactance (2 foL) to resistance (R) is the Q factor of the current Qo. Therefore the voltage across the inductor at resonance is

VL = Q0 x V

i.e. the Q factor times the applied voltage. If Qo is 100 and the supply voltage is 1 V then the voltage drop across L (and C of course) is 100 x 1 = 100V.



Page 511


That is VOLTAGE MAGNIFICATION has taken place which can be applied to another circuit. This magnified voltage is usually tapped off across C. It is usual to have a fixed inductor and variable capacitor to adjust the resonant frequency to that required - for example, tuning a radio station.

SUMMARY


Series Resonance XL = Xc VL = Vc VR = V

i a r T

g n i n

I = Maximum

Z = Minimum = R

I and V in phase fo = 1 2

Power factor = 1

LC

Q = selectivity of circuit depends on (a) resistance - (b) ratio of L

Qo = Reactance

Bandwidth = f0,

Resistance

Qo



Page 512


3.14.6 Resistor, Capacitor and Inductor in Parallel There are many combinations of parallel ac circuits; however, we shall concentrate on the resistance - inductance and capacitive circuit Figure 246

i a r T

g n i n

The phasor diagram for the above circuit is shown in Figure 247. Note that the reference phasor is voltage as this is common to all components in a parallel circuit.


The current in the capacitor (Ic) leads the voltage by 90° and the current in the inductive circuit lags the voltage by some angle less than 90° due to the resistance. The total current from the supply is the phasor addition of Ic and IL

IT =

(IC) 2 + (IL) 2

The formula for impedance in a series circuit cannot be applied to a parallel circuit, instead we use

Z = V/IT

or

Z=

(1/R) 2 + (1/XL – 1/ XC) 2



Page 513



FIGURE 246: R, L, C in Parallel


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 247: Phasor Diagram


Page 514


3.14.7 Parallel Resonance

g n i n

If the frequency to this circuit was varied then at one particular frequency XL = Xc. this is when the current taken from the supply is in phase with the voltage. What is happening in the circuit is that the capacitor is charging

i a r T

up and then discharging through the inductor, the emf induced in the inductor will then charge up the capacitor in the reverse direction and this will continue to circulate a current between the two components.


The circuit is said to be at RESONANCE, so we are now looking at a PARALLEL RESONANT CIRCUIT. The conditions above would continue forever but the inductor has resistance and there is a power loss here. In order to keep the current circulating it is necessary to ' top up'the circuit from the supply.

At resonance the current drawn from the supply is very small and therefore the impedance is high (opposite to the series resonant circuit). Figure 248 shows the relationship of Z and I at resonance It should be noted that the actual current circulating between the inductor and capacitor is high. The phasor diagram (figure 249) shows the conditions at resonance with the supply current in phase with the supply voltage.

The frequency at which resonance occurs in a parallel circuit can be found by:

fo =

1

2

LC



Page 515



FIGURE 248: Graph of Z and I against Frequency


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 249: Phasor Diagram of Resonance


Page 516


At resonance the impedance of the circuit is high, the maximum possible and is called the DYNAMIC IMPEDANCE Zo and can be found by the following formula: ZD = L

ohms

CR The current in the circuit at resonance is therefore: I=V

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M ZD

i a r T

g n i n

The circulating current at resonance has a high maximum value and is equal to Q0 (Q factor is XL remember) times the supply current. So in a parallel resonant circuit CURRENT MAGNIFICATION takes place.

R

Figure 250 shows the impedance - frequency response curve. As for a series circuit the Qo value and selectivity and bandwidth depend on R and the ratio of L to C .

A parallel circuit is often termed a REJECTOR circuit since it presents maximum impedance at resonance.



Page 517



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 250: Impedance/ Frequency Response Curve



Page 518


SUMMARY

Conditions at Resonance - Parallel circuit.

XL = Xc VL = Vc IL = IC fo =1/ 2

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M LC resistance neglected.

I in-phase with V = minimum Z = L = maximum CR

i a r T

g n i n

power factor = 1



Page 519


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 520


3.14.8 Power in an AC Circuits

A practical circuit will contain resistance, inductance and capacitance, and if we take the example of an ac generator supplying aircraft systems (mainly inductance and resistance) then the current will lag the supply voltage.

i a r T

g n i n

The phasor diagram Figure 251 shows the current lagging the supply voltage by phase angle 0. From our previous theory, power is only produced in an ac circuit when current and voltage are in phase. So we need to split the current I into its two components as shown.


The component ' in phase'with the voltage is known as the ACTIVE OR REAL component and the component at 90°'to the voltage is known as the QUADRATURE or REACTIVE component.

It is very important to realize that only one current (1) flows in the circuit and this is the current that is measured by an ammeter in the circuit.



Page 521



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 251: Phasor Diagram of Supply Voltage and Current



Page 522


3.14.8.1 True or Real, Apparent and Reactive Power

The power in a purely resistive ac circuit is found by multiplying together the rms voltage and current. It follows then that in a resistive reactive

g n i n

circuit, power dissipated can be found by multiplying together the voltage and the component of current in phase with it. PREAL = V X IREAL As Cos

= I REAL

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M I

I REAL = I Cos

TRUE OR REAL POWER = V x I x Cos

i a r T

watts (W) or KILOWATTS (kW)

This then gives us the actual power being used by the system. The component of the current that does no work in the system still flows through the system cables and produces power which as we know cancels over one cycle so no net power is produced. PREACTIVE = V x component of current at 90° = V X IREACTIVE

As Sin

= IREACTIVE I

IREACTIVE = I sin



Page 523


REACTIVE POWER = V x I x Sin

VAR OR KVAR

The unit of reactive power is VOLT AMPS REACTIVE (VAR).

g n i n

If the supply voltage is multiplied by the current (I) this will give us the APPARENT POWER being dissipated, we know that this is apparently

i a r T

available but because current and voltage are not in phase then that is not the true power available from the system.


APPARENT POWER = V x I VOLT AMPS (VA) OR KVA



Page 524


3.14.8.2 Power Factor

g n i n

As we have seen we can work out the apparent power of a system in KVA. What we need to know is how much of this available power is producing actual work done in a circuit, i.e. producing True Power. So the ratio of

TRUE POWER

is called the power factor (pf).


APPARENT POWER

Pf = Cos

i a r T

So another formula for power factor is that it equals the cosine of the phase angle.

If we look back at the triangle related to impedance, then the cosine

=R Z

So another formula for power factor is pf = R Z



Page 525


SUMMARY

The true power is produced when current and voltage are in phase. T P = V x I x Cos R P = V x I Sin

KW KVAR

A P = V x I KVA


i a r T

g n i n


Page 526

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS TRANSFORMER (DCAM 3.15) L2)

3.15 TRANSFORMER (EASA Ref. 3.15) Level 2 3.15.1 Transformer principles, construction, and operation 3.15.1.1 Transformer Principles

i a r T

g n i n

A transformer consists of two coils adjacent to each other and an ac supply is applied to one coil known as the PRIMARY. The other coil is


known as the SECONDARY. The changing current in the primary creates a fluctuating magnetic field that induces a voltage in the secondary coil (mutual inductance).

For a transformer to work efficiently, all the lines of flux created by the current in the primary should link with the secondary, this is not possible but to try and get close to this on low frequency transformers an iron core is used. It is suitably laminated to reduce eddy current losses. Because of its high permeability the iron concentrates, and increase, the lines of flux, and flux loss is small. The principle is shown in figure 252. Each winding in the coil is insulated and the two coils are insulated from one another and the iron core. If the secondary is connected to a load, a secondary (ac) current flows and power is developed in the load. A transformer does not generate power it merely transfers power from the primary to the secondary



Page 527



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 252: Iron Cored Transformer



Page 528


3.15.1.2 Basic Construction of a Transformer

Two coils of wire (called windings) are wound on some type of core material. In some cases the coils of wire are wound on a cylindrical or

g n i n

rectangular cardboard form. In effect, the core material is air and the transformer is called an air-core transformer. Transformers used at low frequencies, such as 50 hertz and 400 hertz, require a core of low-reluctance magnetic material, usually iron. This type of transformer is called an iron-core transformer. Most power transformers are of the iron-core type.


The principle parts of a transformer and their functions are:

i a r T

• The CORE, which supports the coils or windings and provides a path for the magnetic lines of flux. • The PRIMARY WINDING, which receives energy from the ac source.

• The SECONDARY WINDING, which receives energy from the primary winding and delivers it to the load. • The ENCLOSURE, which protects the above components from dirt, moisture, and mechanical damage. Core Characteristics

The composition of a transformer core depends on such factors as voltage, current, and frequency. Size limitations and construction costs are also factors to be considered. Commonly used core materials are air, soft iron, and steel. Each of these materials is suitable for particular applications and unsuitable for others. Generally, air-core transformers are used when the voltage source has a high frequency (above 20 kHz).



Page 529


Iron-core transformers are usually used when the source frequency is low (below 20 kHz). A soft-iron-core transformer is very useful where the transformer must be physically small, yet efficient. The iron-core transformer provides better power transfer than does the air-core transformer. A transformer whose core is constructed of laminated sheets of steel dissipates heat readily; thus it provides for the efficient transfer of power. The majority of transformers contain laminated-steel cores.

i a r T

g n i n

These steel laminations (see figure 253a) are insulated with a non-conducting material, such as varnish, and then formed into a core. It takes


about 50 such laminations to make a core an inch thick. The purpose of the laminations is to reduce certain losses that will be discussed later in this part. An important point to remember is that the most efficient transformer core is one that offers the best path for the most lines of flux with the least loss in magnetic and electrical energy.

Figure 253: a) Hollow-core construction,



Page 530


Core Type Transformers There are two main shapes of cores used in laminated-steel-core transformers. One is the Core Type, so named because the core is shaped

g n i n

with a hollow square through the centre. Notice that the core is made up of many laminations of steel. Figure 253(b) illustrates how the transformer windings are wrapped around both sides of the core. Shell-Core Transformers


i a r T

The most popular and efficient transformer core is the shell core, as illustrated in figure 253 (c). As shown, each layer of the core consists of E- and I-shaped sections of metal. These sections are butted together to form the laminations. The laminations are insulated from each other and then pressed together to form the core. Transformer Windings

As stated above, the transformer consists of two coils called windings that are wrapped around a core. The transformer operates when a source of ac voltage is connected to one of the windings and a load device is connected to the other. The winding that is connected to the source is called the Primary Winding. The winding that is connected to the load is called the Secondary Winding. (Note: In this part the terms "primary winding" and "primary" are used interchangeably; the term: "secondary winding" and "secondary" are also used interchangeably.)



Page 531



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 253 (b) Windings wrapped around laminations

Figure 253 (c) Shell-type core constructions



Page 532


3.15.2 Basic Operation of a Transformer Refer to Figure 254; the primary winding is connected to ac voltage source. The magnetic field (flux) builds up (expands) and collapses

g n i n

(contracts) about the primary winding. The expanding and contracting magnetic field around the primary winding cuts the secondary winding and induces an alternating voltage into the winding. In other word, the changing current in the primary creates a fluctuating magnetic field that

i a r T

induces a voltage in the secondary windings (mutual inductance). This voltage causes alternating current to flow through the load. The voltage


may be stepped up or down depending on the design of the primary and secondary windings.



Page 533



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 254: Mutual Inductance



Page 534


3.15.2.1 Schematic Symbols for Transformers Figure 255 shows typical schematic symbols for transformers. The symbol for an air-core transformer is shown in figure (255-a). Parts (b)

g n i n

and (c) show iron-core transformers. The bars between the coils are used to indicate an iron core. Frequently, additional connections are made to the transformer windings at points other than the ends of the windings. These additional connections are called taps. When a tap is

i a r T

connected to the centre of the winding, it is called a Centre Tap. Figure 255 ( c ) shows the schematic representation of a centre-tapped ironcore transformer.


Parts (d) and (e) are simpler to draw or print. Two vertical lines indicate that primary and secondary coils share the core made of transformer sheet metal. With the transformer, manufacturers usually supply a scheme containing info on the primary and secondary coil, voltage and maximal currents. In case that this scheme is lacking, there is a simple method for determining which coil is the primary and which is the secondary: as primary coil consists of thinner wire and greater number of curls than the secondary, it has higher resistance value - the fact that can be easily tested by ohmmeter.

The figure 255 (e) shows the symbol for transformer with two independent secondary coils, one of them having three out connectors. The secondary coil for getting 5V is made of thinner wire with maximal current O.3A, while the other coil is made of thicker wire with maximal current 1.5A. Total voltage on the larger secondary coil is 48V, as shown on the figure (e). Note that voltage values other than those marked on the scheme can be produced - for example, voltage between nodes marked as 27V and 36V equals 9V, voltage between nodes marked as 27V and 42V equals 15V, etc.



Page 535



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 255: Schematic symbols for various types of transformers.



Page 536


3.15.3 Transformer losses

A properly designed transformer is a very efficient device; there are certain factors that prevent the transformation of the input voltage and

g n i n

current to the desired output voltage and current with 1000/0 efficiency. These factors are transformer losses, and they are of three general:

Copper losses, from the materials used in the transformer windings.


Core losses, which come principally from the material, size and shape of the transformer core.

Stray losses of various kinds. Power is lost in an inductor through several different mechanisms:

i a r T

1. Resistance of the windings - ' copper loss' . 2. Magnetic friction in the core - ' hysteresis' .

3. Electric currents induced in the core - ' eddy currents' .

Copper losses occur in the form of heat which is produced by the currents in the conductors of the transformer windings. Called I squared R losses, they relate to the amount of current in the windings and the resistance to the conductors. These losses are minimized by employing large diameter conductors to reduce the resistance per unit length of the wires. Copper losses are generally about twice as great as core losses in most transformers.



Page 537


Core losses, also called "iron losses", mainly affect transformers with cores of magnetic material and are of two kinds: Hysteresis losses and eddy current losses. Hysteresis losses are the main type of core loss, comprising about three fourths of the total. "Hysteresis" describes the tendency of the core material to oppose a change in magnetism.


i a r T

g n i n


Page 538


3.15.4 Methods of overcoming losses Transfer of electrical energy from the primary to the secondary coil is carried out via magnetic field. To prevent energy losses, it is necessary

g n i n

to assure that the whole magnetic field created by the primary coil encompasses the secondary. This is achieved by using the iron core, which has much lower magnetic resistance value than the air, thus containing almost entire magnetic field within the core. It is suitably laminated to

i a r T

reduce eddy current losses. Because of its high permeability the iron concentrates, and increase, the lines of flux, and flux loss is small.


Frequently, transformer cores are formed into a square or rectangular loop to provide a complete, closed path or circuit for the lines of magnetic flux. A solid block of steel with a square hole in the centre has the primary coil wound around one leg and the secondary wound around the other leg. Produce by the current in the primary, the flux is carried almost entirely by the core and passes through the secondary winding to induce the desired emf (voltage).8y using laminated core, (thin sheets of metal instead of a solid iron core) the path of the eddy current is broken up without increasing the reluctance of the magnetic circuit.

The laminations lie in the same direction as the flux. Therefore, the insulating surfaces are directly across the path of the eddy currents. The resulting eddy current reduction improves the efficiency of the transformer.

All of these losses make the typical transformer hot when it operates under full load. In fact, the amount of heat the insulation can take without breaking down helps to determine the power limitations of the transformer. Although some transformers operate too hot to hold comfortably, there should be no odour of burning insulation or varnish, or signs of discoloration or smoke. Any of these conditions would indicate that the transformer is overloaded.



Page 539



i a r T

g n i n


Page 540


3.15.5 Transformer action Under No Load and On Load Conditions The primary in figure 256 has a 100 volt ac supply and its secondary is open-circuited (no load). The current that flows in the primary will

g n i n

cause an alternating flux in the core which will induce a voltage of 200 volts ac in the secondary winding. (Check the turns ratio)

i a r T

The primary alternating flux will also induce a back-emf into the primary winding in opposition to the applied emf. The effective emf acting on the primary is therefore very small and only a very small current will flow into the primary winding. (The foregoing is, of course, a description of


inductive reactance, XL). The very small current that flows in the primary is that current which is necessary to overcome losses and to

magnetize the core. The primary and secondary voltages are in anti-phase and it is usual to show them in this manner on a phasor diagram.

Because the circuit is inductive, the off-load primary current will lag behind the primary voltage. The in-phase component of this current is overcoming copper losses and the quadrature component is magnetizing the core.



Page 541



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 256: Transformer- No Load



Page 542


If the secondary is now carrying current it is important to note that this current provides a flux in the core which opposes the primary flux and so reduces the total flux in the core. This means that the primary back-emf is reduced, with a consequent increase ineffective emf in the primary and so an increase in primary current.

g n i n

Therefore increase in loading on the secondary increases primary current. The phasor diagram below shows the transformer on load.

i a r T

The phasor diagram in figure 257 shows how the load current (Is) is transformed through 180° to become the primary load current (Ip) this is


combined with the off load current (Iou). To give the total primary current (Ip TOTAL) a phasor drawing as shown below is produced.



Page 543



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 257: Transformer - On Load



Page 544


3.15.6 Transformer Connections and Polarity Marking

Transformer Connections

i a r T

g n i n

A transformer is not confined to having just one output winding and voltage. It can have a secondary winding with various tapings to give

differing output voltages, or it can have a combination of both. It is therefore a very versatile piece of equipment. It must be realized that the


individual loads on all these secondary will all combine to be effectively one load as far as the primary winding is concerned.



Page 545



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 258: Secondary Connections



Page 546


Phasing Dots The next diagram Figure 259 shows a transformer with three secondary windings The dots at the ends of the windings are called phasing

g n i n

dots, they show that the polarity at those points will be the same at the same moment in time, i.e. points A, D and E will all be positive together and all negative together. The centre winding is therefore of opposite polarity to the other two secondary windings. That is windings 1 and 3

i a r T

will have a 180° phase shift from the input while winding 2 will be in phase with the input. It will of course be wound in the opposite sense.



Page 547



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 259: Polarity Marking -Dots



Page 548


3.15.7 Efficiency and Regulation Efficiency The efficiency of a transformer is Output power x 100%

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M Input power

As the input is equal to the output + losses, so efficiency may be expressed as

i a r T

g n i n

Output power x 100%

Output power + copper losses + iron losses

Iron losses are reasonably constant, but copper losses vary as the square of the currents flowing. Efficiency is greatest when copper losses are equal to iron losses.



Page 549


Regulation

As more current is drawn from the secondary of a transformer the terminal voltage falls as copper losses increase. The difference between the

g n i n

secondary voltage at no load and the secondary voltage at full load is expressed as a percentage and is known as the REGULATION of the transformer.

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M REGULATION =

FULL LOAD VOLTAGE

Typically this is 1- 2 %


i a r T

NO LOAD VOLTAGE - FULL LOAD VOLTAGE x 100%


Page 550


3.15.8 Three Phase Transformers

A 3 phase transformer is effectively three interconnected single phase transformers with their windings combined on a single magnetic circuit. The most common method of construction is the core type shown in Figure 260.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 260; Three Phase Transformer



Page 551


There are four combinations for three phase transformers: * Star-star * Delta-delta * Delta-star * Star-delta


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 261: Three Phase Transformers Configurations



Page 552



FIGURE 262: Star-Star Three Phase Transformer


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 263: Delta- Delta Three Phase Transformer


Page 553



FIGURE 264: Star – Delta Three Phase Transformer


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 265: Delta – Star Three Phase Transformer


Page 554


Calculations for STAR-STAR transformers are as for single phase transformers except for power. Power = 3 VL IL Cos . There is no phase shift between input and output.

Again, for DELTA-DELTA transformers single phase calculations apply except for power. Power = Again there is no phase shift between input and output.

i a r T

g n i n

3: 1 step-down ratio in addition to the effect of the turns ratio. Figure 264 assumes 1: 1 turns ratio.


The STAR-DELTA transformer has a

3 VL IL Cos .

With this step-down in line voltage there is a 30° phase shift.

The DELTA-STAR transformer has an l:

3 step-up ratio of line voltage in addition to the effect of the turns ratio. Figure 265 assumes 1: 1

ratio. With this step-up in line voltage there is a 30° phase shift.



Page 555


3.15.9 Turns Ratio

If the primary and secondary coils are identical, assuming no losses and the secondary coil is open circuit, the emf induced in the primary coil

g n i n

will be almost equal to but opposite in phase to the applied voltage. This secondary coil will produce a mutually induced voltage which is exactly the same as the primary back emf.

i a r T

If the number of turns on the secondary is increased its inductance increases, and hence the induced emf increases. If the secondary has


twice the number of turns of the primary the secondary voltage will be twice the applied voltage at the primary. With three times as many turns on the secondary as the primary, the secondary emf will be three times that in the primary. Secondary voltage (Vs) is T times the primary voltage (Vp)

Vs = T x Vp

Where T is the TURNS RATIO

=

Number of turns on the secondary (Ns}

Number of turns on the primary (Np)

VS = NS x VP NP

Or

VS = NS

VP


NP


Page 556


Transformation Ratio (T) The ratio of Vs to Vp (or Ns to Np) is known as the Transformation Ratio. If Vs is smaller than Vp , then the output will be less than the input and the transformer is called a Step-down transformer.

i a r T

g n i n

A Step-up transformer is one in which Vs is greater than Vp. When using Transformation Ratios, IT IS CONVENTIONAL TO ALWAYS PUT


THE SECONDARY VOLTAGE BEFORE THE PRIMARY VOLTAGE.

Thus, a transformation ratio of 4: 1 means that the output voltage will be four times the input voltage (step-up) and a transformation ratio of 1:3 means that the output voltage will be one-third the input voltage (step-down).

Any chance of confusion on this point can, of course, be obviated by the use of the appropriate term of ' step-up'or ' step-down'after the stated ratio.

If there are more turns on the secondary than on the primary i.e. T greater than 1 the secondary voltage is greater than the primary and we have a STEP-UP TRANSFORMER. (Figure 266)

If there are fewer turns on the secondary than on the primary i.e. T less than 1 then the secondary voltage is less than input voltage and we have a STEP- DOWN TRANSFORMER. (Figure 267)



Page 557


f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M FIGURE 266: Step up Transformer

i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 267: Step down Transformer



Page 558


Assuming no losses then the input power of a transformer equals the output power.

Vp Ip= Vs Is

g n i n

Therefore in a step-up transformer where the voltage is stepped up the current is stepped down and in a step-down transformer where the voltage is stepped down the current is stepped up.


As Vp Ip = Vs Is, then Ip = Vs Is

and as

Vs = Ns Vp

Vp

i a r T

Np

Then Ip = Vs = Ns Is

Vp

Np



Page 559



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 268: Voltage and Current in Secondary



Page 560


3.15.10 Autotransformers

This is a special type of transformer that has only a SINGLE winding, which serves as both the primary and the secondary. It follows that a

g n i n

portion of the winding is common to both the input and to the output. It may be used either as a step-up or as a step-down transformer.

i a r T

If an ac supply is applied to the primary terminals, an alternating current will flow through those coils connected across PI and P2. This will set up an alternating flux which will link with all of the turns on the former, inducing a voltage in each.


The output voltage is therefore that which appears in the coils across terminals S1 and S2. Loading the secondary will have the same effect as described for the Power Transformer. If the current flow is considered for one particular half-cycle, it will be seen that the primary and secondary currents are opposing each other in the common portion of the winding.

The actual current flow in the common portion is therefore the difference between the two currents. This means that the cross-section area of the copper can be decreased in the common portion, bringing about a saving in weight.

This saving is obviously most beneficial on auto-transformers where the input voltage and the output voltage are very close together and the vast majority of the winding is common One disadvantage of this type of transformer, especially when used as a step-down is that, in the event of an open-circuit occurring in the common portion of the winding, the input voltage will be applied to theload They are increasingly found in aircraft lighting circuits for example.



Page 561



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 269: Auto Transformer



Page 562


The Current Transformer The Current Transformer is designed to enable circuit currents to be measured without breaking into the circuit, as is necessary with an

g n i n

ammeter or its shunt. The output of the current transformer may be applied directly to an instrument or be used in control circuits.

i a r T

It works on the principle of mutual inductance but its construction and mode of operation are different to that of the power transformer. Current


transformers, use the load' s supply cable as the primary winding.



Page 563



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 270: Current Transformer



Page 564

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS FILTERS (DCAM 3.16 L1)

3.16 FILTERS (EASA Ref 3.16) Level 1 3.16.1 Introduction

g n i n

The rectifier circuitry takes the initial ac sine wave from the transformer or other source and converts it to pulsating dc. A full wave rectifier will

i a r T

produce the waveform shown in Figure, while a half-wave rectifier will pass only every other half-cycle to its output. This may be good enough for a basic battery charger, although some types of rechargeable batteries still won' t like it. In any case, it is nowhere near good enough for


most electronic circuitry. We need a way to smooth out the pulsations and provide a much "cleaner" dc power source for the load circuit.

To accomplish this, we need to use a circuit called a filter (Figure 271). In general terms, a filter is any circuit that will remove some parts of a signal or power source, while allowing other parts to continue on without significant hindrance. In a power supply, the filter must remove or drastically reduce the ac variations while still making the desired dc available to the load circuitry. Filter circuits aren' t generally very complex, but there are several variations. Any given filter may involve capacitors, inductors, and/or resistors in some combination. Each such combination has both advantages and disadvantages, and its own range of practical application.

A common need for filter circuits is in high-performance stereo systems, where certain ranges of audio frequencies need to be amplified or suppressed for best sound quality and power efficiency. You may be familiar with equalizers, which allow the amplitudes of several frequency ranges to be adjusted to suit the listener' s taste and acoustic properties of the listening area.



Page 565


f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M Figure 271: full-wave rectifier waveform

i a r T

g n i n

Figure 272: Filter



Page 566


You may also be familiar with crossover networks, which block certain ranges of frequencies from reaching speakers. A tweeter (highfrequency speaker) is inefficient at reproducing low-frequency signals such as drum beats, so a crossover circuit is connected between the tweeter and the stereo' s output terminals to block low-frequency signals, only passing high-frequency signals to the speaker' s connection

g n i n

terminals. This gives better audio system efficiency and thus better performance. Both equalizers and crossover networks are examples of filters, designed to accomplish filtering of certain frequencies.


i a r T

Another practical application of filter circuits is in the "conditioning" of non-sinusoidal voltage waveforms in power circuits. Some electronic devices are sensitive to the presence of harmonics in the power supply voltage, and so require power conditioning for proper operation. If a distorted sine-wave voltage behaves like a series of harmonic waveforms added to the fundamental frequency, then it should be possible to construct a filter circuit that only allows the fundamental waveform frequency to pass through, blocking all (higher-frequency) harmonics. The characteristics of a filter can be shown on a graph called a frequency response curve (Figure 273); the block symbols are shown in Figure 274



Page 567


f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M Figure 273: Frequency Response Curve

i a r T

g n i n

Figure 274: Block Diagram Symbols for Filters



Page 568


3.16.2 The Cut-off Frequency

g n i n

The boundary line in question is somewhat arbitrary, because there is no clear frequency such that all signals above it are passed intact, while all signals below that frequency are entirely blocked. Rather, there will be a "transition zone," or range of frequencies, over which the input signals, will be partially transmitted to the output.


i a r T

Nevertheless, we must select some specific frequency such that we can say (for the high-pass filter) that all signals above this frequency will be passed without appreciable loss, while all signals below this frequency will be blocked to a significant extent. This frequency will be designated as the cut-off frequency (often designated fco) for our filter. We have already noted that for very high frequencies there will be no appreciable voltage drop across the capacitor, while for very low frequencies there will be no appreciable voltage drop across the resistor. The transition zone, then, must be in between these extremes, where some of the signal voltage will be dropped across each of the components. And the logical place to start is to set the cut-off frequency at the point where the voltage drops across the two components are the same. This is also the frequency at which XC = R.

The cut-off frequency is also the frequency at which half of the power in the input signal is absorbed by the filter, and only the other half makes it to the output. Therefore, it is sometimes known as the half power frequency, although that designation is no longer used as much as it was in the past.



Page 569


3.16.3 Operation, application and uses: low-pass

g n i n

A low-pass filter is a filter that passes low frequencies but attenuates (or reduces) frequencies higher than the cut-off frequency. The actual amount of attenuation for each frequency varies from filter to filter. There are two basic kinds of circuits capable of accomplishing this objective and many variations of each one.


Low pass filter: Made up of Inductors and Capacitors

i a r T

The simple form of low pass filter that made up of inductors and capacitors are shown in Figure 275.

FIGURE 275 : Low Pass Filters



Page 570


At very low frequencies the impedance of the capacitor is high, acting almost like an open circuit. At very high frequencies the capacitor acts almost like a short circuit.

i a r T

g n i n

The impedance of the inductor is low at low frequencies and high at high frequencies ( XL = 2 fl ). With a combination of these two different


effects the voltage gain tends to zero. By using a π type filter the voltage drops off more steeply. The value of L and C for the filter can be calculated from:



Page 571


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 572


The Frequency Response Curve All low-pass filters are rated at a certain cut-off frequency. That is, the frequency above which the output voltage falls below 70.7% of the input

g n i n

voltage. This cut-off percentage of 70.7 is not really arbitrary, all though it may seem so at first glance. In a simple capacitive/resistive lowpass filter, it is the frequency at which capacitive reactance in ohms equals resistance in ohms. In a simple capacitive low-pass filter (one resistor, one capacitor); the cut-off frequency is given as:


i a r T

A main characteristic of low pass filter is shown in Figure 276. Note that the frequency scale is logarithmic rather than linear. In addition, the attenuation of the filter is shown in units called decibels (db). This is also a logarithmic unit used to show ratios. Mathematically, voltage gain or loss is described as:

An ideal filter transmits frequencies in its pass-band un-attenuated and without phase shift, while not allowing any signal components in the stop-band to get through. The cut-off frequency or corner frequency (fco) defines the start of the transition region between the pass-band and the stop-band. Ideally this region should be zero. For Training Purposes Only


Page 573


Real filters are far from ideal. Although they provide attenuation in the stop-band, they also subject the input signal in the pass-band to attenuation, ripple and phase-shift. In addition there is the transition region between the pass-band and the stop-band. The specifications define the fco as the frequency where attenuation reaches 3 dB. Within the transition region the specifications indicate how fast signals roll-off during attenuation.


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 276; A main characteristic of low pass filter



Page 574


3.16.4 Operation, application and uses: high-pass

g n i n

A high-pass filter' s task is just the opposite of a low-pass filter: to offer easy passage of a high-frequency signal and difficult passage to a lowfrequency signal. As one might expect, the inductive and capacitive versions of the high-pass filter are just the opposite of their respective low-

i a r T

pass filter designs. The capacitor' s impedance increases with decreasing frequency. This high impedance in series tends to block lowfrequency signals from getting to load.


The simple form of low pass filter that made up of inductors and capacitors are shown in Figure 277.

Figure 277: High pass filter that made up of inductors and capacitors



Page 575


This filter requires components that allows current flow at high frequencies but also acts as an open circuit at low frequencies. This can be achieved by a capacitor in series. The parallel element must have the property of a short circuit at low frequencies but have large impedance at high frequencies and this is satisfied by an inductor.


i a r T

g n i n


Page 576


The Frequency Response Curve As with low-pass filters, high-pass filters have a rated Gut-off frequency, above which the output voltage increases above 70.7% of the input

g n i n

voltage. Just as in the case of the capacitive low-pass filter circuit, the capacitive high-pass filter' s cut-off frequency can be found with the same formula:


i a r T

In the example circuit, there is no resistance other than the load resistor, so that is the value for R in the formula. A main characteristic of high pass filter is shown in Figure 278. The shaded area is the ideal and the curve is the practical operation.



Page 577



i a r T

g n i n

Figure278: High-pass Frequency Response Curve



Page 578


3.16.5 Operation, application and uses: band-pass

There are applications where a particular band, or spread, or frequencies need to be filtered from a wider range of mixed signals. Filter circuits

g n i n

can be designed to accomplish this task by combining the properties of low-pass and high-pass into a single filter. The result is called a bandpass filter. Creating a band-pass filter from a low-pass and high-pass filter can be illustrated using block diagrams in Figure 279.


i a r T

Figure 279: Band-pass Block Diagram



Page 579


Band-pass Filter: Made up of Resistors and Capacitors R1and C1 form a high-pass filter, while R2 and C2 form a low-pass filter (Figure 280 )the purpose of discussion, we arbitrarily assign a cut-off frequency fco1= 10 radians/sec for R1 and C1, and a higher cut-off frequency fco2 = 10,000 radians/sec for R2 and C2. The actual

g n i n

frequencies don' t matter, so long as fcoi is less than fco2. That way, R1 and C1pass signals that will also be passed by R2 and C2.

i a r T

It is equally possible to swap the two filter sections, putting the low-pass filter first. However, if we use the circuit shown here, the dc resistance


between VOUT and ground is R1+ R2. If we swap the two filters, R1 will be the only resistance from VOUT to ground. In addition, the second filter section will present a load to the first section.

Since the low-pass section has a higher cut-off frequency (fco2), R2 and C2have higher impedances and constitute less of a load on R1and C1than would be true if the sections were swapped. Therefore the two filters operate pretty much independently, even though they are electrically connected.

Figure 280: Band-pass Filter That Made up of Resistors and Capacitors



Page 580


The Frequency Response If we apply the cut-off frequencies assumed above, the frequency response curve for our filter will appear as shown in Figure. R1 and C1 govern the low-frequency cut-off, and will block signals at lower frequencies while passing higher-frequency signals. These signals will also be

g n i n

passed by R2 and C2, so long as their frequency doesn' t get too high. Frequencies above fc o2 pass through C2 to ground, and therefore are kept away from VOUT.


i a r T

Figure 281: Band-pass Frequency Response



Page 581


3.16.6 Operation, application and uses of the following filters: band stop

Band-stop is a filter that stops the transmission of frequencies between fco1 and fco2. A band-stop filter, also known as a notch, band-reject,

g n i n

or band-elimination filter, passes all signals lying out with the band, in essence its operation is the opposite to that of a band-pass filter. Figure 282 shows the simple circuit for a band stop filter. Figure 283 shows the characteristics


i a r T

Figure 282: Simple Circuit for a Band Stop Filter



Page 582


The bandwidth is defined as the difference between the upper critical frequency and the lower critical frequency. The critical frequency, fc (also called the cut-off frequency) defines the end of the pass-band and is normally specified at the point where the response drops to -3 dB (70.7%) from the pass band response. To put it another way the critical frequencies are defined as the points at which the response curves is 70.7% of it maximum.

g n i n

The series element this time is parallel resonant circuits and the shunt element is a series resonant circuit. At the lower frequencies the series

i a r T

resonant circuit impedance is high and the parallel resonant circuit impedance is low, around the resonant frequencies the parallel circuit


impedance is high and the series is low, therefore frequencies are blocked in this range. As the frequency increases the parallel circuit impedance falls and the series circuit increases so frequencies are passed again.

Figure 283: Characteristics of a band-stop filter



Page 583


Applications We have looked at some simple filter arrangements and it should be realised other filters will be quite sophisticated and will be combined with operational amplifiers. Some applications of filters in aircraft are: •

HF Communication Transceiver

•

VOR Receivers

•

Marker Beacon Receiver

•

ILS Receiver

•

Engine Vibration Monitoring Systems

•

Automatic Flight Control Systems

•

Flight Director Systems

•

Voice Recorder



i a r T

g n i n


Page 584

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS AC GENERATORS (DCAM 3.17 L2)

3.17 AC GENERATORS (EASA Ref 3.17) Level 2 3.17.1 Rotation of a Loop in a Magnetic Field and Waveform Produced

g n i n

Regardless of size, all electrical generators, whether dc or ac, depend upon the principle of magnetic induction. An emf is induced in a coil as

i a r T

a result of a coil cutting through a magnetic field, or a magnetic field cutting through a coil. As long as there is relative motion between a conductor and a magnetic field, a voltage will be induced in the conductor. That part of a generator that produces the magnetic field is called


the field. That part in which the voltage is induced is called the armature.

For relative motion to take place between the conductor and the magnetic field, all generators must have two mechanical parts a rotor and a stator. The rotor is the part that rotates; the stator is the part that remains stationary. In a dc generator, the armature is always the rotor. In alternators, the armature may be either the rotor or stator.

3.17.2 Rotating-Armature Alternators

This type of ac machine is similar in construction to a dc generator in that the rotor rotates in a fixed field with the emf picked off via slip rings. The rotor windings are laid in slots along the rotor periphery, the armature being laminated to reduce eddy current losses. The stator carries the dc excitation windings wound on the pole pieces to create alternate North and South poles around the stator. Figure 284 shows a single phase 2 pole machine with output as shown in Figure 285.



Page 585



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 284: Rotating-armature Alternator ( 2 Pole ,Single Phase )

FIGURE 285 :Induced EMF –Single Phase AC



Page 586


One cycle of voltage is induced when the conductor moves through 360° past one pair of poles. If there are two pairs of poles then two cycles of ac will be produced.

g n i n

The number of cycles of induced voltage of an actual generator will correspond to the number of pairs of poles in the generator and is called the frequency (f). f = Np Hertz


i a r T

where N = speed in rpm of the generator at which the generator must be driven in order to generate the required frequency p = number of pairs of poles.

An ac generator in which the whole of the output consists of a single winding with the outer ends connected to a pair of slip rings is termed a ' single phase generator' , if there were two windings at different angles connected to slip rings then this would give two outputs and would be known as a ' two-phase generator' .

Figure 286 shows a three phase system, in which the coils are at 120° to each other and the 3 phase output generated. In other words it is really 3 generators in one with 3 separate outputs each one 120° out of phase with the next.



Page 587



FIGURE 286: Three Phase 2 Pole AC Generator

i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 287 : 3 Phase Induced EMF



Page 588


Three phase supplies are used extensively on (large) aircraft - as is most national grid systems. This type of generator, however, is not used as a main generating source on its own as it has the following disadvantages.

(a) As all the power is taken from the rotor, the effective insulation and ventilation causes problems. (b) All the (heavy) output is taken via slip rings and brushes. (c) Centrifugal forces are considerable on the rotor windings.


i a r T

g n i n


Page 589


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 590


3.17.3 Rotating-Field Alternators

In this type of generator the dc field rotates and its field cuts the stationary (output) windings on the stator. The output windings consist of a

g n i n

number of coils connected in series and inserted in slots in the laminated stator to give a single phase output. The field windings are fed via two slip rings and brushes with dc. The principle of a two pole single phase ac generator is shown in figure 288.

i a r T

The general arrangement of a single phase rotating field ac generator is shown in figure 289. If another set of single phase windings at 90° to


one another is added, then a two phase output is produced one being 90° out of phase with the other. Figure 290

FIGURE 288 : Single Phase 2 Pole Rotating Field Type



Page 591


f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M FIGURE 289 : Single Phase AC Generator

i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 290: Two Phase Rotating Field and Two Phase Output



Page 592


If another set of two coils is added and each coil in the complete system is spaced at 60° to each other then we have a three phase system. Each pair of coils is spaced at 120° to one another so we have 3 phases where the 3 outputs are 120° out of phase. Figure 291 The advantages of the rotating field generator over the rotating armature type are:

(a) Only two slip rings and brushes taking much less current, ie field winding current only.


(b) Less problems with centrifugal effects on rotor windings.

i a r T

© The output is taken from the stator, where ventilation and insulation of windings is less of a problem.

g n i n

FIGURE 291: 2 Pole Three Phase AC Generator ( Rotating Field)



Page 593


The first ac generating systems on aircraft used rotating field ac generators in what was called a ‘frequency wild’ system. ( Figure 292 ) The 3 phase output was controlled and converted to dc and fed to the aircraft busbar (from which all services take their supplies). The generator output voltage was controlled to 200 volts but the frequency varied with engine speed. This frequency wild ac was fed to resistive loads such as heater mats, where the variable frequency has no effect. (With inductive and capacitive loads the total resistance of the circuit

g n i n

would vary with frequency). The output of ac generators on most large aircraft today is 3 phase 200/ 115V 400Hz. 400Hz constant frequency with 200V and 115V supplies available depending on how the load is connected to the generator


i a r T

FIGURE 292: Three Phase AC Generator- Frequency Wild



Page 594


3.17.4 Three Phase Star and Delta Connections

g n i n

Each phase of a three phase generator can be brought out to separate terminals and used to supply separate loads independently, which will require six leads. However, considerable saving in cable (weight) and other advantages can be obtained by connecting a lead from one end of each of the three phase windings as shown in figure 293.


i a r T

This shows that the three windings are connected to one point and a lead is taken from that point. This configuration is called STAR CONNECTION and the point where they meet is called the star point, and the lead taken from the star point is called the neutral .

Figure 293 shows that the line current = the phase current. ( IL =IP )

The phase voltage (Vphase) on an aircraft generator would be 115v and the line voltage (Vline) which is the sum of the two phase voltages across that line ie two 115v phases at 120° phase angle, which is 200V and mathematically is the same as multiplying the phase voltage by 3. ( VL = 3 VP

The big advantage of the star connection is that with the neutral line we are able to provide two voltages – 200V and 115V. Aircraft ac generators are generally connected in star.



Page 595



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 293: Star Connection



Page 596


Another connection of the three coils would be to connect them as shown in figure 294, known as DELTA CONNECTION. In this case the three windings are connected in series to form a closed mesh, with the three output lines at the junction points.

As can be seen from figure 294, VP =VL

i a r T

g n i n

In this connection the line current is composed of two components and mathematically it can be shown that: IL = 3 IP


The delta connection does not have a neutral and cannot provide two outputs and must be connected to a balanced load, but does give a higher current output than a star connected system.



Page 597



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 294: Delta Connections



Page 598


3.17.5 Permanent Magnet Generator With reference to figure 295, when the generator drive shaft rotates the Permanent Magnet Generator (PMG) rotates and its field cuts the

g n i n

winding on the stator (3 star wound coils) and induces an ac into it. This is fed externally to the Voltage Regulator in the Generator Control Unit (GCU).

i a r T

The GCU is the ' brains'of the system which controls the generator output, looks after its well-being and its relationship with other generators


in the system. The ac is rectified to dc and adjusted to the correct voltage and returned to the main exciter stator field (stationary dc field winding).

As the magnetic field is cut by the 3 rotating coils of the rotating assembly, a 3 phase ac output is generated. This ac is fed through the 3 phase full wave rectifier bridge (also rotating) to provide dc to the main generator field. This rotating field cuts the star connected stator winding to produce a 3 phase 200/ 115V 400Hz output.

As you can see this generator consists of a permanent magnet generator, rotating armature and rotating field generators.



Page 599



i a r T

g n i n

.FIGURE 295: Permanent Magnet Generator ( Brushless AC Generator )



Page 600


3.17.6 Prime Movers

g n i n

All generators, large and small, ac and dc, require a source of mechanical power to turn their rotors. This source of mechanical energy is called a prime mover. Prime movers are divided into two classes for generators-high-speed and low-speed. Steam and gas turbines are high-

i a r T

speed prime movers, while internal-combustion engines, water, and electric motors are considered low speed prime movers.


The type of prime mover plays an important part in the design of alternators since the speed at which the rotor is turned determines certain characteristics of alternator construction and operation. 3.17.7 Alternator Rotors

There are two types of rotors used in rotating-field alternators. They are called the turbine-driven and salient-pole rotors. As you may have guessed, the turbine-driven rotor shown in figure 296, view A, is used when the prime mover is a high-speed turbine. The windings in the turbine-driven rotor are arranged to form two or four distinct poles. The windings are firmly embedded in slots to withstand the tremendous centrifugal forces encountered at high speeds.

The salient-pole rotor shown in Figure 296 (B), is used in low-speed alternators. The salient-pole rotor often consists of several separately wound pole pieces, bolted to the frame of the rotor.



Page 601


If you could compare the physical size of the two types of rotors with the same electrical characteristics, you would see that the salient-pole rotor would have a greater diameter. At the same number of revolutions per minute, it has a greater centrifugal force than does the turbinedriven rotor. To reduce this force to a safe level so that the windings will not be thrown out of the machine, the salient pole is used only in lowspeed designs.


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 296: Types of rotors used in alternators



Page 602


3.17.8 Alternator Characteristics and Limitations

Alternators are rated according to the voltage they are designed to produce the maximum current they are capable of providing. The maximum

g n i n

current that can be supplied by an alternator depends upon the maximum heating loss that can be sustained in the armature. This heating loss (which is a 12R power loss) acts to heat the conductors, and if excessive, destroys the insulation. Thus, alternators are rated in terms of this

i a r T

current and in terms of the voltage output - the alternator rating in small units is in volt-amperes; in large units it is kilovolt-amperes.


When an alternator leaves the factory, it is already destined to do a very specific job. The speed at which it is designed to rotate, the voltage it will produce, the current limits, and other operating characteristics are built in. This information is usually stamped on a nameplate on the case so that the user will know the limitations.



Page 603


3.17.9 Power in a Three Phase System

The power in a single phase system is True Power = V x I x Cos

Watts

i a r T

True Power in a balanced three phase Star or Delta system must be three times that in a single phase system.

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M True Power = 3 Vph Iph cos

In a star connected system

Watts

IL = Iph

g n i n

So the formula can be written

True Power = 3VphILcos

And as VL = 3 VP

Watts

VP = VL

3

Then

True Power = 3 x VL IL Cos 3

= 3 VL IL Cos


Watts


Page 604


For a delta connected system VL = Vph

then the formula can be rewritten

True Power = 3VL I ph Cos

watts

f o g y n r i r a t e e e i n r i p g o n r P SE A M And as IL = 3 IP

IP = IL

3

True Power = 3 VL IL Cos

Watts

i a r T

g n i n

3

= 3 VL IL Cos

Watts

So for Star or Delta connected systems there are two formulas for power.

1. True Power = 3Vph Iph cos

watts

2. True Power = 3 VL IL cos

watts



Page 605


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 606

PART 66 CAT B1.1/B2 MODULE 3 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS AC MOTORS (DCAM 3.18 L2)

3.18 AC MOTORS (EASA Ref 3.18) Level 2 3.18.1 Introduction

g n i n

There are advantages in the use of ac motors besides the wide availability of ac power. In general, ac motors cost less than dc motors. Some

i a r T

types of ac motors do not use brushes and commutators. This eliminates many problems of maintenance and wear. It also eliminates the problem of dangerous sparking. An ac motor is particularly well suited for constant-speed applications. This is because its speed is


determined by the frequency of the ac voltage applied to the motor terminals.

Also, in aircraft employing constant-frequency alternating current either as the primary or secondary source of electrical power, it is of course logical to utilize ac motors and although they do not always serve as a complete substitute for dc machine, the advantages and special operating characteristic of certain types are applied to a number of systems which rely upon mechanical energy from electromotive power source.

The dc motor is better suited than an ac motor for some uses, such as those that require variable- speeds. An ac motor can also be made with variable speed characteristics but only within certain limits. Industry builds ac motors in different sizes, shapes, and ratings for many different types of jobs. These motors are designed for use with either poly-phase or single-phase power systems. It is not possible here to cover all aspects of the subject of ac motors. Only the principles of the most commonly used types are dealt with in this chapter.



Page 607


In this chapter, ac motors will be divided into:

(1) Synchronous (2) Induction motors

i a r T

g n i n

Single-phase and poly-phase motors will be discussed. Synchronous motors, for purposes of this chapter, may be considered as poly-phase


motors, of constant speed, whose rotors are energized with dc voltage. Induction motors, single-phase or poly-phase, whose rotors are energized by induction, are the most commonly used ac motor.



Page 608


3.18.2

Rotating Magnetic Fields

The principle of rotating magnetic fields is the key to the operation of most ac motors. Both synchronous and induction types of motors rely on

g n i n

rotating magnetic fields in their stators to cause their rotors to turn. The idea is simple. A magnetic field in a stator can be made to rotate electrically, around and around. Another magnetic field in the rotor can be made to chase it by being attracted and repelled by the stator field. Because the rotor is free to turn, it follows the rotating magnetic field in the stator.


i a r T

Rotating magnetic fields may be set up in two-phase or three-phase machines. To establish a rotating magnetic field in a motor stator, the number of pole pairs must be the same as (or a multiple of) the number of phases in the applied voltage. The poles must then be displaced from each other by an angle equal to the phase angle between the individual phases of the applied voltage.

3.18.2.1 Two-Phase Rotating Magnetic Fields

A rotating magnetic field is probably most easily seen in a two-phase stator. The stator of a two-phase induction motor is made up of two windings (or a multiple of two). They are placed at right angles to each other around the stator. The simplified drawing in Figure 297 illustrates a two-phase stator. If the voltages applied to phase 1-1A and 2-2A are 90° out of phase, the currents that flow in the phases are displaced from each other by 90°. Since the magnetic fields generated in the coils are in phase with their respective currents, the magnetic fields are also 90° out of phase with each other. These two out-of-phase magnetic fields, whose coil axes are at right angles to each other, add together at every instant during their cycle. They produce a resultant field that rotates one revolution for each cycle of ac. For Training Purposes Only


Page 609



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 297: Two-phase Motor Stator



Page 610


To analyze the rotating magnetic field in a two-phase stator, refer to Figure 298. The arrow represents the rotor. For each point set up on the voltage chart, consider that current flows in a direction that will cause the magnetic polarity indicated at each pole piece. Note that from one point to the next, the polarities are rotating from one pole to the next in a clockwise manner. One complete cycle of input voltage produces a

g n i n

360-degree rotation of the pole polarities. Let' s see how this result is obtained. The waveforms in Figure 298 are of the two input phases, displaced 90° because of the way they were generated in a two-phase alternator. The waveforms are numbered to match their associated

i a r T

phase. Although not shown in this figure, the windings for the poles 1-1A and 2-2A would be as shown in the previous figure. At position 1, the


current flow and magnetic field in winding 1-1 A is at maximum (because the phase voltage is at maximum). The current flow and magnetic field in winding 2-2A is zero (because the phase voltage is zero). The resultant magnetic field is therefore in the direction of the 1-1A axis.

At the 45-degree point (position 2), the resultant magnetic field lies midway between windings 1-1A and 2-2A. The coil currents and magnetic fields are equal in strength.

At 900 (position 3), the magnetic field in winding 1-1A is zero. The magnetic field in winding 2-2A is at maximum. Now the resultant magnetic field lies along the axis of the 2-2A winding as shown. The resultant magnetic field has rotated clockwise through 900 to get from position 1 to position 3. When the two-phase voltages have completed one full cycle (position 9), the resultant magnetic field has rotated through 3600 Thus, by placing two windings at right angles to each other and exciting these windings with voltages 900 out of phase, a rotating magnetic field results. Two-phase motors are rarely used except in special purpose equipment. They are discussed here to aid in understanding rotating fields. You will, however, encounter many single phase and three-phase motors.



Page 611



i a r T

g n i n

.

FIGURE 298: Two-Phase Rotating Field



Page 612


3.18.2.2 Three-Phase Rotating Fields

g n i n

The three-phase induction motor also operates on the principle of a rotating magnetic field. The following discussion shows how the stator windings can be connected to a three-phase ac input and has a resultant magnetic field that rotates. Figure 299, views a - c show the individual windings for each phase. Figure 299, view d, shows how the three phases are tied together in a Y-connected stator. The dot in

i a r T

each diagram indicates the common point of the Y-connection. You can see that the individual phase windings are equally spaced around the


stator. This places the windings 1200 apart.

The three-phase input voltage to the stator of Figure 299 is shown in the graph of Figure 300. Use the left-hand rule for determining the electromagnetic polarity of the poles at any given instant. In applying the rule to the coils in Figure 299, consider that current flows toward the terminal numbers for positive voltages, and away from the terminal numbers for negative voltages. The results of this analysis are shown for voltage points 1 through 7 in Figure 300.

At point 1, the magnetic field in coils 1-1A is maximum with polarities as shown. At the same time, negative voltages are being felt in the 2-2A and 3-3A windings. These create weaker magnetic fields, which tend to aid the 1-1A field. At point 2, maximum negative voltage is being felt in the 3-3A windings. This creates a strong magnetic field that, in turn, is aided by the weaker fields in 1-1A and 2-2A. As each point on the voltage graph is analyzed, it can be seen that the resultant magnetic field is rotating in a clockwise direction. When the three-phase voltage completes one full cycle (point 7), the magnetic field has rotated through 3600.



Page 613



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 299: Three-phase, Y-connected Stator



Page 614


3.18.2.3 Rotor Behavior in a Rotating Field For purposes of explaining rotor movement, let' s assume that we can place a bar magnet in the centre of the stator diagrams of Figure 300.

g n i n

We' ll mount this magnet so that it is free to rotate in this area. Let' s also assume that the bar magnet is aligned so that at point 1 its south pole is opposite the large N of the stator field. You can see that this alignment is natural. Unlike poles attract, and the two fields are aligned so that they are attracting.


i a r T

Now, go from point 1 through point 7. As before, the stator field rotates clockwise. The bar magnet, free to move, will follow the stator field, because the attraction between the two fields to exist. A shaft running through the pivot point of the bar magnet would rotate at the same speed as the rotating field. This speed is known as synchronous speed. The shaft represents the shaft of an operating motor to which the load is attached. Remember, this explanation is an oversimplification. It is meant to show how a rotating field can cause mechanical rotation of a shaft. Such an arrangement would work, but it is not used. There are limitations to a permanent magnet rotor.



Page 615



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 300: Three-phase Rotating Field Polarities and Input Voltages



Page 616


3.18.3 Construction, Principles of operation and Characteristics of AC Synchronous Motor

The construction of the synchronous motors is essentially the same as the construction of the salient-pole alternator. In fact, such an

g n i n

alternator may be run as an ac motor. It consists essentially of an AC armature, normally wound on the stator frame, with a DC field winding wound on a salient--pole rotor. The AC voltage is applied to the armature and a separate DC supply usually 110 V, is connected to the rotor

i a r T

through slip rings. In itself, the synchronous motor has no starting torque, and special starting arrangements are necessary. Figure 301


Synchronous motors have the characteristic of constant speed between no load and full load. They are capable of correcting the low power factor of an inductive load when they are operated under certain conditions. They are often used to drive dc generators. Synchronous motors are designed in sizes up to thousands of horsepower. They may be designed as either single phase or multiphase machines. The discussion that follows is based on a three-phase design.

To understand how the synchronous motor works, assume that the application of three-phase ac power to the stator causes a rotating magnetic field to be set up around the rotor. The rotor is energized with dc (it acts like a bar magnet). The strong rotating magnetic field attracts the strong rotor field activated by the dc. This results in a strong turning force on the rotor shaft. The'rotor is therefore able to turn a load as it rotates in step with the rotating magnetic field. It works this way once it' s started. However, one of the disadvantages of a synchronous motor is that it cannot be started from a standstill by applying three-phase ac power to the stator. When ac is applied to the stator, a high-speed rotating magnetic field appears immediately.



Page 617



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 301: Revolving-field synchronous motor.



Page 618


This rotating field rushes past the rotor poles so quickly that the rotor does not have a chance to get started. In effect, the rotor is repelled first in one direction and then the other. A synchronous motor in its purest form has no starting torque. It has torque only when it is running at synchronous speed. A squirrel-cage type of winding is added to the rotor of a synchronous motor to cause it to start. The squirrel cage is

g n i n

shown as the outer part of the rotor in figure 302. It is so named because it is shaped and looks something like a turnable squirrel cage.

i a r T

Simply, the windings are heavy copper bars shorted together by copper rings. A low voltage is induced in these shorted windings by the


rotating three-phase stator field. Because of the short circuit, a relatively large current flows in the squirrel cage. This causes a magnetic field that interacts with the rotating field of the stator. Because of the interaction, the rotor begins to turn, following the stator field; the motor starts.

Figure 302: Self-starting synchronous AC Motor



Page 619



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 303: Action of A Synchronous Motor



Page 620


As the name implies the motor runs at the same speed as the rotating field (synchronous speed) and this speed is dependent on the supply frequency. Reversal of rotation is achieved by changing over any two of the three phase inputs. The machine runs at a speed proportional to input frequency and is therefore used as the motor in engine speed indicators. With an input of 400Hz from an aircraft system it is a constant speed machine and so was used to drive the earlier flight data recorders. 3.18.4 Construction , Principles of operation and Characteristics of AC Induction Motor


i a r T

g n i n

The induction motor is the most commonly used type of ac motor. Its simple, rugged construction costs relatively little to manufacture. The induction motor has a rotor that is not connected to an external source of voltage. The induction motor derives its name from the fact that ac voltages are induced in the rotor circuit by the rotating magnetic field of the stator. In many ways, induction motor is similar to the induction between the primary and secondary windings of a transformer. Large motors and permanently mounted motors that drive loads at fairly constant speed are often induction motors. Examples are found in washing machines, refrigerator compressors, bench grinders, and table saws. The stator construction of the three-phase induction motor and the three-phase synchronous motor are almost identical. However, their rotors are completely different (see Figure 304 (a)). The induction rotor is made of a laminated cylinder with slots in its surface. The windings in these slots are one of two types (shown in Figure 304 (b), (c)). The most common is the squirrel-cage winding. This entire winding is made up of heavy copper bars connected together at each end by a metal ring made of copper or brass. No insulation is required between the core and the bars. This is because of the very low voltages generated in the rotor bars. The other type of winding contains actual coils placed in the rotor slots. The rotor is then called a wound rotor.



Page 621


Regardless of the type of rotor used, the basic principle is the same. The rotating magnetic field generated in the stator induces a magnetic field in the rotor. The two fields interact and cause the rotor to turn. To obtain maximum interaction between the fields, the air gap between the rotor and stator is very small.


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 304: Induction motor and the types of ac induction motor rotors.



Page 622


Principle of Operation When a three phase ac supply is applied to the stator we know it creates a rotating magnetic field whose speed is directly proportional to the

g n i n

input frequency. This rotating magnetic field cuts the copper or aluminium bars and induces an emf into them, this emf produces a current in the bars which sets up a magnetic field. The rotor field and rotating stator field interact causing the rotor to turn in an attempt to line up the two

i a r T

magnetic fields. As the stator field is rotating the rotor never quite catches up but follows a little behind.


The basic principle is, assuming the rotating field is stopped for a moment as shown in figure 305

The conductor shown is one of the bars on the rotor showing an induced current direction as shown. Then the motor principle applies and by Fleming' s Left Hand Rule the bar experiences a force acting on it, and the conductor tends to follow the movement of the field As the rotor follows the field, the relative motion between the two is reduced and therefore the voltage induced into the bars. This reduces the rotor current and the turning force on the rotor. The rotor speed is automatically adjusted to something less than that of the rotating field , otherwise there would be no relative motion, no current and no movement of the rotor.

The difference between the rotor speed and rotating magnetic field speed is called the SLIP SPEED.

The ratio of the slip speed to the rotating magnetic field speed is known as SLIP.



Page 623



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 305: Principle of Induction Motor



Page 624


The starting torque of induction motors is poor. On start, the frequency is at its maximum in the rotor and the rotor has low resistance but high inductance. This causes the rotor current to lag the induced emf by almost 90° so interaction between the rotor field and the rotating field is poor. To improve the starting torque it is necessary to bring rotor current and emf more into phase. This can be achieved by using aluminium

g n i n

bars on the rotor instead of copper. This increases the resistance of the rotor bringing voltage and current more into phase and there is greater interaction between the two fields and better starting torque results.

i a r T

To reverse the rotation of this machine, change over any two connections of the three phase input and this will cause the rotating field to


reverse direction and consequently the rotor will reverse its rotation.

Speed of the motor for a set number of poles per phase is purely dependent on input frequency, which on an aircraft with Constant Frequency generating system is set at 400Hz. These motors are used on aircraft as hydraulic pumps, fuel pumps, flap motors.

3.18.5 Two Phase Induction Motor

Note the inputs to the two phases are 900 out of phase with each other. One of these phases is normally called the ' reference phase'and has a fixed supply fed to it. The other phase is called the ' control phase'which is 900 ahead or 900 behind the reference phase ie has a variable phase supply to allow for reversal of rotation of the motor. 900 ahead of the reference will produce the opposite direction of rotation of the magnetic field and thus the motor; so the input to the control phase must be able to produce 1800 phase reversal (900 ahead of reference to 900 behind the reference). For Training Purposes Only


Page 625


The speed of the motor once again depends on the input frequency. These motors are used extensively as servo-motors in instruments systems and other systems on aircraft.


i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 306: Two Phase Induction Motor



Page 626


3.18.6 Single-Phase Induction Motors

g n i n

There are probably more single-phase ac induction motors in use today than the total of all the other types put together. It is logical that the least expensive, lowest maintenance type of ac motor should be used most often. The single-phase ac induction motor fits that description.

i a r T

Unlike poly-phase induction motors, the stator field in the single-phase motor does not rotate. Instead it simply alternates polarity between poles as the ac voltage changes polarity.


Voltage is induced in the rotor as a result of magnetic induction, and a magnetic field is produced around the rotor. This field will always be in opposition to the stator field (Lenz' s law applies). The interaction between the rotor and stator fields will not produce rotation, however. The double-ended arrow in figure 307, view A shows the interaction. Because this force is across the rotor and through the pole pieces, there is no rotary motion, just a push and/or pull along this line.

Now, if the rotor is rotated by some outside force (a twist of your hand, or something), the push-pull along the line in figure 307, view A, is disturbed. Look at the fields as shown in figure 307, view B. At this instant the south pole on the rotor is being attracted by the left-hand pole. The north rotor pole is being attracted to the right-hand pole. All of this is a result of the rotor being rotated 900 by the outside force. The pull that now exists between the two fields becomes a rotary force, turning the rotor toward magnetic correspondence with the stator. Because the two fields continuously alternate, they will never actually line up, and the rotor will continue to turn once started. It remains for us to learn practical methods of getting the rotor to start.



Page 627


There are several types of single-phase induction motors in use today. Basically they are identical except for the means of starting. In this chapter we will discuss the split-phase and shaded-pole motors; so named because of the methods employed to get them started. Once they are up to operating speed, all single-phase induction motors operate the same.


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 307: Rotor Currents in a Single-Phase AC Induction Motor



Page 628


3.18.6.1 Single-phase Induction Motors

Single--phase induction motors are not inherently self-starting, and function subject to a pulsating magnetic field. Consequently, the torque

g n i n

produced is also pulsating and not constant. With a three-phase motor the field is displaced by 120°. In the case of a single phase supply there is no phase displacement and hence the rotor has equal and opposing forces acting on it and there will be no movement. The motor is

i a r T

therefore not self--starting. However, if the rotor is spun mechanically, it will accelerate in the direction it was turned, until a speed is reached which is just below that of synchronous speed. The creation of an artificial phase displacement is therefore required. This is much the same


way as a three--phase induction motor operates.



Page 629


NOTES


i a r T

g n i n


Page 630


3.18.6.2 Split-phase Induction Motor This type of machine can be tailored to be self-starting by adding another winding, displaced exactly 900 electrically on the stator and

g n i n

connected in parallel with the original winding. Known as a split-phase induction motor; the two windings are wired in parallel, producing a two phase rotating magnetic field due to a difference of impedance. In practice, the ' start'winding has a higher resistance than the ' run'winding

i a r T

and is taken out of circuit automatically by means of a centrifugal switch or timed relay. This is illustrated in Figure 308.The start winding in general practice has a smaller gauge wire for higher resistance and low reactance. The main winding is of thick wire, with a low resistance and


high reactance. As the start and run windings are not pure inductors but have an element of resistance in them owing to the natural resistance of the coils, it causes the current flow to be less than 900 out of phase with the voltage. In practice this type of motor will develop a phase differential of about 400 between the current in the start windings and the current in the run windings. This results in poor starting torque and a slight drop in speed when load is applied. In this motor the start winding is much thinner than the run winding.

Consequently, should the centrifugal switch fuse, or not function, the starting winding will be permanently connected in the circuit during normal operation. Although in principle this does not affect motor operation significantly, it must be realized that this winding is designed for intermittent operation (for start-up only). Therefore, when permanently connected in the circuit due to switch failure, it will quickly heat up and raise the motor temperature excessively and eventually burn out the windings. The split-- phase induction motor is employed when the starting load is small or there is no load at all, as, for example, in large domestic appliances such as vacuum cleaners, or workshop pedestal drills. The split--phase motor is factory connected, and such its direction of rotation is fixed (counter--clockwise when viewed from the opposite end of the shaft extension). To reverse the direction of rotation it is necessary to reverse the connection to the starting winding or the run winding but not both together.



Page 631



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 308: Single-Phase Induction Motors-Circuit Diagrams



Page 632


3.18.6.3 Split-Phase Induction Motors

One type of induction motor, which incorporates a starting device, is called a split-phase induction motor. Split-phase motors are designed to

g n i n

use inductance, capacitance, or resistance to develop a starting torque. The principles are those that you learned in your study of alternating current.


3.18.6.4 Capacitor-Start

i a r T

The first type of split-phase induction motor that will be covered is the capacitor-start type. Figure 309 shows a simplified schematic of a typical capacitor-start motor. The stator consists of the main winding and a starting winding (auxiliary). The starting winding is connected in parallel with the main winding and is placed physically at right angles to it. A 90-degree electrical phase difference between the two windings is obtained by connecting the auxiliary winding in series with a capacitor and starting switch.

When the motor is first energized, the starting switch is closed. This places the capacitor in series with the auxiliary winding. The capacitor is of such value that the auxiliary circuit is effectively a resistive-capacitive circuit (referred to as capacitive reactance and expressed as Xc). In this circuit the current leads the line voltage by about 450 (because X C about equals R). The main winding has enough resistance-inductance (referred to as inductive reactance and expressed as XL) to cause the current to lag the line voltage by about 450 (because X L about equals R). The currents in each winding are therefore 900 out of phase - so are the magnetic fields that are generated. The effect is that the two windings act like a two-phase stator and produce the rotating field required to start the motor. For Training Purposes Only


Page 633


When nearly at full speed is obtained, a centrifugal device (the starting switch) cuts out the starting winding. The motor then runs as a plain single-phase induction motor. Since the auxiliary winding is only a light winding, the motor does not develop sufficient torque to start heavy loads. Split-phase motors, therefore, come only in small sizes.


i a r T

g n i n

Figure 309: Capacitor-start, AC Induction Motor



Page 634


3.18.6.5 Resistance-Start

g n i n

Another type of split-phase induction motor is the resistance-start motor. This motor also has a starting winding (shown in Figure 310) in addition to the main winding. It is switched in and out of the circuit just as it was in the capacitor-start motor. The starting winding is positioned

i a r T

at right angles to the main winding. The electrical phase shift between the currents in the two windings is obtained by making the impedance of the windings unequal. The main winding has a high inductance and a low resistance. The current, therefore, lags the voltage by a large


angle. The starting winding is designed to have a fairly low inductance and a high resistance. Here the current lags the voltage by a smaller 0

angle. For example, suppose the current in the main winding lags the voltage by 70 . 0

The current in the auxiliary winding lags the voltage by 40 . The currents are, therefore, out of phase by 300. The magnetic fields are out of phase by the same amount. Although the ideal angular phase difference is 900 for maximum starting torque, the 30-degree phase difference still generates a rotating field. This supplies enough torque to start the motor. When the motor comes up to speed, a speed-controlled switch disconnects the starting winding from the line, and the motor continues to run as an induction motor. The starting torque is not as great as it is in the capacitor-start.



Page 635



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 310: Resistance-Start AC Induction Motor



Page 636


3.18.6.6 Shaded-Pole Induction Motors

The shaded-pole induction motor is another single-phase motor. It uses a unique method to start the rotor turning. Constructing the stator in a

g n i n

special way produces the effect of a moving magnetic field. This motor has projecting pole pieces just like some dc motors. With reference to Figure, each of the poles is split into two with one half fitted with a copper or aluminium ring (shading). The rotor is of the normal induction

i a r T

motor design. As the single-phase supply starts to rise flux builds up in the pole pieces and there is a flux path (φ1) across the pole pieces.


The build up of flux in the other half pole pieces cuts the copper ring, and emf is induced whose field opposes the build up of flux (Lenz' s Law) in the shaded portion of the pole pieces.

As the supply falls to zero the field collapse φ1 dies away. However, this change of flux in the shaded portion induces an emf in the shading ring and this time the induced emf tries to keep the original flux from decaying in the shaded portion of the pole pieces and the field φ2 is formed. The next half cycle this is repeated creating not a rotating field more of a rocking field between φ1 and φ2. In addition, a copper strap called a shading coil surrounds portions of the pole piece surfaces. A pole piece with the strap in place is shown in Figure 311.



Page 637



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 311: Shaded-Pole Induction Motors



Page 638


The strap causes the field to move back and forth across the face of the pole piece. Note the numbered sequence and points on the magnetization curve in the figure. As the alternating stator field starts increasing from zero (1), the lines of force expand across the face of the pole piece and cut through the strap. A voltage is induced in the strap. The current that results generates a field that opposes the cutting

g n i n

action (and decreases the strength) of the main field. This produces the following actions: As the field increases from zero to a maximum at 900, a large portion of the magnetic lines of force are concentrated in the un-shaded portion of the pole (1).

i a r T

At 900 the field reaches its maximum value. Since the lines of force have stopped expanding, no emf is induced in the strap, and no opposing


magnetic field is generated. As a result, the main field is uniformly distributed across the pole (2). From 900 to 1800 the main field starts decreasing or collapsing inward. The field generated in the strap opposes the collapsing field. The effect is to concentrate the lines of force in the shaded portion of the pole face (3).

You can see that from O0 to 1800, the main field has shifted across the pole face from the un-shaded to the shaded portion. From 1800 to 3600, the main field goes through the same change as it did from O0 to 1800; however, it is now in the opposite direction (4). The direction of the field does not affect the way the shaded pole works. The motion of the field is the same during the second half-cycle as it was during the first half of the cycle. The motion of the field back and forth between shaded and un-shaded portions produces a weak torque to start the motor.

Because of the weak starting torque, shaded-pole motors are built only in small sizes. They drive such devices as fans, clocks, blowers, and electric razors. As the field is not fully rotating, the starting torque of this motor is poor it is used for light loads only. Speed again is determined by input frequency. Reversal of rotation cannot be achieved unless the shading rings are transferred to the other half of the pole pieces which is not a practical proposition. They are used in some engine pressure indication instruments. For Training Purposes Only


Page 639



i a r T

g n i n

Figure 312: Shaded poles as used in shaded-pole ac induction motors



Page 640


3.18.7 Speed of Single-Phase Induction Motors

The speed of induction motors is dependent on motor design. The synchronous speed (the speed at which the stator field rotates) is

g n i n

determined by the frequency of the input ac power and the number of poles in the stator. The greater the number of poles, the slower the synchronous speed. The higher the frequency of applied voltage, the higher the synchronous speed. Remember, however, that neither

i a r T

frequency nor numbers of poles are variables. The manufacturer fixes them both. The relationship between poles, frequency, and


synchronous speed is as follows:

where n is the synchronous speed in rpm, f is the frequency of applied voltage in hertz, and p is the number of poles in the stator. Let' s use an example of a 4-pole motor, built to operate on 60 hertz. The synchronous speed is determined as follows:



Page 641


Common synchronous speeds for 60-hertz motors are 3600, 1800, 1200, and 900 rpm, depending on the number of poles in the original design. As we have seen before, the rotor is never able to reach synchronous speed. If it did, there would be no voltage induced in the rotor. No torque would be developed. The motor would not operate. The difference between rotor speed and synchronous speed is called slip. The

g n i n

difference between these two speeds is not great. For example, a rotor speed of 3400 to 3500 rpm can be expected from a synchronous speed of 3600 rpm.


i a r T


Page 642


3.18.8 Speed Control of AC Motor Single--phase Motors

g n i n

Single--phase speed control is generally confined to split phase capacitor aided motors where automatic mechanical switching to isolate the

i a r T

start winding is not required. Motors employed in such circuits are designed with high impedance windings to limit the current at lower speeds. Both series and shaded pole machines are also ideally suited for speed control and examples may be drawn from the modern record deck


and the hand--held electric drill. For obvious reasons, speed control is not suitable for all types of machines but for the machines which are suited, control may be gained by use of the following ways: •

Series impedance control (linear resistance)

•

Solid state linear control (electronic)

•

Autotransformer control (electro--mechanical

Figure 313, detail a) illustrates schematically how speed control is effected by means of an autotransformer. The transformer is constructed from a single length of copper wire wound many times around a laminated iron core. Throughout its length, output tapping V1 to V4 provides steps either to increase or to decrease the voltage supplied to the motor. These, in turn, are connected mechanically to an adjustable voltage selector device and the complete assemblage is wired in series formation with the connected load. Should the motor fail to respond to the minimum voltage range, the output tapings may be adjusted to a higher value.



Page 643


Advantages gained from using this method of speed control include •

reduced starting current

•

torque proportional to voltage applied

•

smoother starting sequence.

Disadvantages are


•

higher installation costs

•

regular maintenance required

•

only certain types of motors are suitable

i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 313 (A): AC Motor Speed Control



Page 644


Speed Control of Induction and Synchronous Motors Historically both induction and synchronous motors have been considered to be single--speed machines because the synchronous (rotating

g n i n

magnetic field) speed has always been fixed by the supply frequency, which is constant. Pole changing motors have been used to give some control of speed, but continuous control is not possible with this method.


i a r T

The speed of a wound--rotor induction motor can be reduced by adding resistance to the rotor circuit via the slip rings, but this is an expensive and inefficient method of speed control. However, starting torque is higher although the wound rotor motor is inherently less robust than the cage--rotor type. Excluding this method, the speed of an induction motor will be only slightly lower than synchronous speed, so some running speeds are impossible at normal power frequencies

The traditional single--speed role of the induction motor has been changed by the use of modern power electronics. Using such methods, it is possible to rectify the three--phase supply to give a direct current, and then to invert this direct supply to provide a three--phase system of any required frequency.

Since the synchronous speed of the motor, and hence its running speed, are directly related to supply frequency, electronic frequency control will also give speed control (see Figure 313, detail b)). In some cases battery--driven vehicles use this method, the DC battery supply being inverted to the variable--frequency supply needed to give speed control. Since the induction motor is far more rugged and is likely to need less maintenance than its direct--current counterpart, the advantage is clear.



Page 645



i a r T

g n i n

FIGURE 313 (B): AC Motor Speed Control



Page 646

a) DCAM Part 66 - Module 3.pdf

Recommend Documents